Menu

Mark 1:44 — Word Study

Depth

N1904καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

BSAAndkai He sayslegō to him;autos [those who need to know] do see [that]horaō nothingmēdeis [no one, nothing] to nonemēdeis may you speak;legō Butalla do go,hupagō [depart, go away] yourselfseautou do showdeiknuō [exhibit, present] to theho priesthiereus [one who serves God, a spiritual leader] andkai do offerprospherō [offer, bring near, a gift, a sacrifice] forperi theho cleansingkatharismos [purification, spiritual renewal] of yousu whathos, hē commandedprostassō [ordered, commanded] MosesMōusēs, Mōsēs [the Hebrew lawgiver] foreis a testimonymarturion [proof, evidence] to them.autos

Word
Listen & take awayMark 1
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 44 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (autos) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Mark 1:44quick helps
In a sentenceJesus instructs the healed leper to keep silent about his healing and to present himself to the priest along with the prescribed offering.
Who is speakingJesus, addressing the healed leper.
Where we areThe context is a post-healing directive from Jesus to the leper.
The hard wordἱερεῖ
Take awayThe healed man is to follow the law and provide testimony of his healing.
5 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Trapp, Cambridge & more — read them › clause subjectΜωϋσῆς verbλέγω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Mark 1:44

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Jesus Heals a Lepergenerated

42And immediately the leprosy left him, and the man was cleansed.
43Jesus promptly sent him away with a stern warning:
44“See that you don’t tell anyone. But go, show yourself to the priest and present the offering Moses prescribed for your cleansing, as a testimony to them.”
45But the man went out and openly began to proclaim and spread the news. Consequently, Jesus could no longer enter a town in plain view, but He stayed out in solitary places. Yet people came to Him from every quarter.

Mark 1:44 describes Jesus healing a leper and instructing him not to tell anyone about the miracle. Instead, the leper is to go to the priest and offer the sacrifices that Moses commanded for his cleansing. This directive serves as a testimony to the priest and the community about the healing and the authority of Jesus. The context emphasizes the importance of following the law and the role of the priest in confirming the healing.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Leviticus 14:2–32“This is the law for the one afflicted with a skin disease on the day of his cleansing, when he is brought to the priest.
2Matthew 23:2–3“The scribes and Pharisees sit in Moses’ seat.
3Luke 5:14“Do not tell anyone,” Jesus instructed him. “But go, show yourself to the priest and present the offering Moses prescribed for your cleansing, as a testimony to them.”
4Luke 17:14When Jesus saw them, He said, “Go, show yourselves to the priests.” And as they were on their way, they were cleansed.
5Romans 15:4For everything that was written in the past was written for our instruction, so that through endurance and the encouragement of the Scriptures, we might have hope.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 6 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ἱερεῖ, hiereusgenerated

The Greek word ἱερεύς (hiereus) means 'priest' and refers to one who serves in a sacred capacity, particularly in the context of Jewish worship. This term is used to denote those who perform sacrificial rites and lead religious ceremonies.

In this verse, the leper is instructed to show himself to the priest, highlighting the priest's role in the community as a mediator between God and the people, especially in matters of ritual purity and healing.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as: 'See that you don’t tell anyone. But go, show yourself to the priest and present the offering Moses prescribed for your cleansing, as a testimony to them.' This wording is consistent across several translations.

Where translations differ is primarily in the rendering of λέγει. The BSB uses 'says', while the KJV opts for 'saith', and the ASV uses 'saith unto him'.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is λέγει, He says, which governs several phrases: an infinitive phrase indicating what the leper is to do, a prepositional phrase specifying to whom he is to go, and a participial phrase detailing what he is to present.

The structure includes a series of commands directed at the leper, emphasizing the actions he must take following his healing.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἱερεύς corresponds to the Hebrew word כֹּהֵן (kohen) in the Septuagint, which also means 'priest'. This connection highlights the continuity of the priestly role in both the Old and New Testaments.

The offering prescribed by Moses reflects the ritual laws found in the Pentateuch, underscoring the importance of following God's commands regarding purification.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Mark 1:44 shows Jesus healing a leper and instructing him to keep the healing a secret while going to the priest. He is to present the required offering as a testimony of his healing. This emphasizes the importance of following the law and the priest's role in confirming the healing.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Why did Jesus tell the leper not to tell anyone?

Jesus wanted to avoid drawing unnecessary attention to Himself and to fulfill His mission without interruption.

What was the significance of showing himself to the priest?

Showing himself to the priest was necessary for the leper to be declared clean according to Jewish law, allowing him to reintegrate into society.

What offering was the leper to present?

The leper was to present the offering prescribed by Moses, which included specific sacrifices for cleansing from leprosy as outlined in Leviticus 14.

How does this passage relate to the Old Testament?

This passage connects to the Old Testament laws regarding purification and the role of the priest in declaring someone clean after a healing.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What does this passage teach us about obedience to God's commands?
  2. How can we apply the principle of testimony in our own lives?
  3. In what ways does this story illustrate the relationship between faith and healing?
  4. What can we learn from the leper's response to Jesus' instructions?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church writings reference this passage to discuss the significance of Jesus' healing and the role of the priest in the community.

Apostolic ConstitutionsCONSTITUTIONS OF THE HOLY APOSTLES c. 375–380
Which law is so very holy and righteous, that even our Saviour, when on a certain time He healed one leper, and afterwards nine, said to the first, "Go, show thyself to the high priest,

The Apostolic Constitutions highlight the holiness of the law, noting that Jesus instructed the healed leper to show himself to the priest as part of the healing process.

Early Church Fathers on Mark 1 →
BedeOn the Gospel of Mark c. 673–735
But go and show yourself to the chief priests, etc. He is ordered to show himself to the priest so that the priest might understand that he was cured not by the order of the law, but by the grace of God above the law.

Bede emphasizes that the leper's presentation to the priest demonstrates that his healing was by divine grace rather than mere adherence to the law.

Early Church Fathers on Mark 1 →

Commentators on this verse — 5 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Mark 1:44 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And saith unto him, see thou say nothing to any man,.... By the way, till he came to the priest; but go thy way, show thyself to the priest: the Syriac and Persic versions read, "to the priests"; and

Read John Gill on Mark 1 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And there came a leper to him, beseeching him, and kneeling down to him, and saying unto him, If thou wilt, thou canst make me clean. For the exposition, see the notes at Matthew 8:1-4.

Read Robert Jamieson on Mark 1 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

44 And saith unto him, See thou say nothing to any man: but go thy way, shew thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing those things which Moses commanded, for a testimony unto them. Ver. 44.

Read John Trapp on Mark 1 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

44. shew thyself to the priest] that he may attest the reality of thy cure (Leviticus 14:3). those things which Moses commanded] viz. (1) two birds, “alive and clean,” Leviticus 14:4, (2) cedar wood, (3) scarlet, and (4) hyssop; this was for the preliminary ceremony (Leviticus 14:4-7). On the eighth day further offerings were to be made, (1) two he lambs without blemish, (2) one ewe lamb, (3) three tenth deals of fine flour, (4) one log of oil. If the leper was poor, he was permitted to offer one lamb and two turtledoves or two young pigeons, with one tenth deal of fine flour. for a testimony unto them] Rather, for a testimony against them, i. e. against their unbelief in refusing to…

Read Cambridge on Mark 1 →
Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible

§ 29. — HEALING OF A LEPER, Mark 1:40-45.(See notes on Matthew 8:2-4.)

Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Mark 1 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

“See that you don’t tell anyone. But go, show yourself to the priest and present the offering Moses prescribed for your cleansing, as a testimony to them.”

WEBWorld English Bible2000

and said to him, “See that you say nothing to anybody, but go show yourself to the priest and offer for your cleansing the things which Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.”

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

“See that you don’t tell anyone. But go, show yourself to the priest and present the offering Moses prescribed for your cleansing, as a testimony to them.”

NETBNew English Translation2006

He told him, “See that you do not say anything to anyone, but go, show yourself to a priest, and bring the offering that Moses commanded for your cleansing, as a testimony to them.”

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And saith unto him, See thou say nothing to any man: but go thy way, shew thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing those things which Moses commanded, for a testimony unto them.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

and saith unto him, See thou say nothing to any man: but go show thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing the things which Moses commanded, for a testimony unto them.

RVARevised Version, American1894

and saith unto him, See thou say nothing to any man: but go thy way, shew thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing the things which Moses commanded, for a testimony unto them.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And saith to him, See thou say nothing to any man; but go, show thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing those things which Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And sayde vnto him, See thou say nothing to any man, but get thee hence, and shewe thy selfe to the Priest, and offer for thy clensing those things, which Moses commanded, for a testimoniall vnto them.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

and says to him, See thou say nothing to any one, but go, shew thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing what Moses ordained, for a testimony to them.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and saith to him, 'See thou mayest say nothing to any one, but go away, thyself shew to the priest, and bring near for thy cleansing the things Moses directed, for a testimony to them.'

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and says to him, “See [that] you may say nothing to anyone, but go away, show yourself to the priest, and bring near for your cleansing the things Moses directed, for a testimony to them.”

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

He said to him, “Be sure to say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, as a testimony to them.”

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And he saith to him: See thou tell no one; but go, shew thyself to the high priest, and offer for thy cleansing the things that Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

“Make sure you don't tell anybody anything about this,” he told him. “Go to the priest and show yourself to him. Give the offering which is required by the law of Moses for such cleansing, so that people will have proof.”

BBEBible in Basic English1949

See that you say nothing to any man: but go and let the priest see you, and make yourself clean by an offering of the things ordered by Moses, for a witness to them.

Word by word, the decisions they made

λέγειlegō He says G3004 2 different renderings
sayASV BBE GNV KJV NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
saysDBY LSV
μηδενὶmēdeis nothing G3367 3 different renderings
nothingASV BBE DBY GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
no oneDRA
notNETB
μηδὲνmēdeis to none G3367 3 different renderings
nothingASV BBE DBY GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
no oneDRA
notNETB
εἴπῃς·legō may you speak; G2036 4 different renderings
sayASV BBE DBY GNV KJV NETB NWB RVA YLT
may sayLSV
saidWEB
he saidULB
δεῖξονdeiknuō do show G1166 2 different renderings
showASV FBV LSV NETB NWB ULB WEB
presentBSB MSB
προσένεγκεprospherō do offer G4374 3 different renderings
offerASV DBY DRA GNV KJV NWB RVA ULB WEB
offeringBBE BSB FBV MSB NETB
bring nearLSV YLT

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseκαὶAndclauseclauseclause · adverbialverbἐμβριμησάμενοςhaving sternly warnedobjectαὐτῷhimadverbialεὐθὺςimmediatelyverbἐξέβαλενHe sent awayobjectαὐτόνhimκαὶAndclauseverbλέγειHe saysindirect objectαὐτῷto himclauseclauseverbὍραSee [that]clauseindirect objectμηδενὶnothingobjectμηδὲνto noneverbεἴπῃςyou speakἀλλὰButclauseverbὕπαγεgoclauseclauseobjectσεαυτὸνyourselfverbδεῖξονshownoun phrase · indirect objectτῷto theἱερεῖpriestκαὶandclauseverbπροσένεγκεofferprepositional phrase · adverbialπερὶfornoun phraseτοῦthenoun phraseκαθαρισμοῦcleansingσουof younoun phrase · objectclauseobjectwhatverbπροσέταξενcommandedsubjectΜωϋσῆςMosesprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςfornoun phraseμαρτύριονa testimonyαὐτοῖςto them

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

et dicit ei : Vide nemini dixeris : sed vade, ostende te principi sacerdotum, et offer pro emundatione tua, quæ præcepit Moyses in testimonium illis.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܐܡܪ ܠܗ ܚܙܝ ܠܡܐ ܠܐܢܫ ܐܡܪ ܐܢܬ ܐܠܐ ܙܠ ܚܘܐ ܢܦܫܟ ܠܟܗܢܐ ܘܩܪܒ ܩܘܪܒܢܐ ܚܠܦ ܬܕܟܝܬܟ ܐܝܟܢܐ ܕܦܩܕ ܡܘܫܐ ܠܣܗܕܘܬܗܘܢ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ· ὅρα, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς· ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Mark 1:44καίAndAndκαίλέγωHe saysHe saysλέγωαὐτόςto him;to him;αὐτόςὁράωdo see [thado see [that]ὁράωμηδείςnothingnothingμηδείςμηδείςto noneto noneμηδείςειπηςmay you spemay you speak;ειπηςἀλλάButButἀλλάὑπάγωdo go,do go,ὑπάγωσύyourselfyourselfσύδείκνυμιdo showdo showδείκνυμιto theto theἱερεύςpriestpriestἱερεύςκαίandandκαίπροσφέρωdo offerdo offerπροσφέρωπερίforforπερίthetheκαθαρισμόςcleansingcleansingκαθαρισμόςσύof youof youσύὅςwhatwhatὅςπροστάσσωcommandedcommandedπροστάσσωΜωϋσῆςMosesMosesΜωϋσῆςεἰςforforεἰςμαρτύριονa testimonya testimonyμαρτύριοναὐτόςto them.to them.αὐτόςπρόςPrep. to, Prep. to, towarπρόςἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦεἶπονv. I say, v. I say, speakεἶπονὑπόPrep. by, Prep. by, underὑπόἱερόςAdj sacredAdj sacred, holἱερόςκαθαρίζωv. I make v. I make cleanκαθαρίζωφημίv. I sayv. I sayφημίὀπτάνομαιv. I appeav. I appear, amὀπτάνομαιἄλλοςAdj other,Adj other, anotἄλλοςπέρανAdv over, Adv over, beyonπέρανArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗμάρτυςn.m. a witn.m. a witnessμάρτυςἀμήνHebr. veriHebr. verily, tἀμήνπροστάσσωv. I instrv. I instruct, προστάσσωἐπερωτάωv. I interv. I interrogatἐπερωτάωπαραγγέλλωv. I notifv. I notify, coπαραγγέλλω
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Mark 1:44

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
λέγειlegō He says G3004 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
2,255× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to say or speak, and it is used by Jesus and others in the New Testament to share teachings and tell stories. It appears in Matthew 9:34 and John 1:29.
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λέγω (legō) is a primary Greek verb meaning 'to say' or 'to speak.' It encompasses a range of uses, including expressing thoughts, making declarations, and narrating events. The New Testament frequently employs it in direct speech and as a way to convey meaning, such as in Matthew 27:11. Abbott-Smith notes its distinction from similar verbs like λαλέω.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λέγω (legō) — to say.

λέγω,

__B pick up, etc.: tenses for signification 1 and 11, future λέξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἔλεξα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future in passive sense λέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐλέγμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist ἐλέχθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]-; post-[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), passive εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (see. the compounds); also future λεγήσομαι (συλ-): aorist 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

lego

a primary verb; properly, to "lay" forth, i.e. (figuratively) relate

(in words (usually of systematic or set discourse; whereas 2036 and

5346 generally refer to an individual expression or speech

respectively; while 4483 is properly to break silence merely, and 2980

means an extended or random harangue)); by implication, to mean:--ask,

bid, boast, call, describe, give out, name, put forth, say(-ing, on),

shew, speak, tell, utter.

see GREEK for 2036

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 2980

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λέγω

v.

I say, speak

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%saying
saying35% · 480×says13% · 175×i say12% · 164×he says9% · 122×say5% · 70×he was saying3% · 42×they say2% · 31×other renderings17% · 225×other renderings4% · 48×

1,357 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 107 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,255 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
αὐτός
πρόςμαθητήςa learner, disciἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςἐγώ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article theδέbut, on the otheγόνυa knee
ἀμήνHebr
ἀμήνHebrαὐτόςλέγωI say, speak
λέγωHe says2255×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciἸησοῦςJesusΠέτροςPeter
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becοὐNegἐάνCond
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπρόςαὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theοὗτοςσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλέγω · 2,255× in the New Testament
Luke John Matthew Mark Acts Revelation Hebrews Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians James Galatians

76 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,290 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων ,

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἑτερᾶς· νότου γῆ Τακοίμιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Χενσθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου Ἀείους, λιβὸς περίχωμα, τῆς δʼ ἄλλης λεγομένης Πκρώ· νότου γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
αὐτῷ·autos to him; G846 Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Amplified meaning
those who need to know
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DSM — Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςto him;5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
ὅρα,horaō do see [that] G3708 Verb · present · active · imperative · second person · singular
682× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'to see' or 'to perceive', and can also mean 'to attend to' or 'to experience', like in Mark 6:38 and John 1:46. It's a key word for understanding and perceiving things.
Tyndale gloss
to see: see
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὁράω (i.e., *horaō*) means 'to see' and is derived from various roots. It encompasses physical sight, mental perception, and the act of attending to or experiencing something. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as visiting others (Luke 8:20) and discerning spiritual truths (Romans 15:21). Different lexicons note variations in its grammatical forms and uses, particularly regarding its aorist tense.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁράω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for ראה, also for חזה, etc.;]

in "durative" sense (hence aor. act., εἶδον, pass., ὤφθην, fut., ὄψομαι, from different roots; v. M, Pr., 110 f.), to see (in colloq. even the pres. is rare, its place being generally taken by βλέτω, θεωρέω, v. Bl., § 24).

Of bodily vision, to see, perceive, behold: absol., Mk 6:38, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jo 1:46, al.; seq. ὅτι, Mk 2:16, al.; c. acc., Mt 2:2, Mk 1:10 16:7, Ga 1:19, al.; θεόν, Jo 1:18, I Jo 4:20, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁράω, -ὦ ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἑώρων (Jn. vi. 2, where LTr WH ἐθεώρουν) ; pf. ἑώρακα and (T WH in Col. ii. 1, 18; [1 Co. ix.1]; Tdf. ed. 7 also in Jn. ix. 37; xv. 24; xx. 25; 1 Jn. ili. 6; iv. 20; 3Jn. 11) ἑόρακα (on which form ef. [WH. App. p. 161; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Steph. Thesaur. s. v. 2139 4.1; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 325; [B. 64 (56); Veitch s.v.]), [2 pers. sing. -ces (Jn. viii. 57 Tr mrg.) see κοπιάω, init.], 3 pers. plur. ἑωράκασιν (and -καν in Col. ii. 1 L Tr WH; Lk. ix. 36 T Tr WH; see yivoμαι, init.) ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. ἑωράκει (Acts vii. 44) ; fut. ὄψομαι (fr. ONTO), 2 pers. sing. ὄψει (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 347sq.; Kiihner § 211, 3, i. p.536), Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn.i. 50 (51); xi.40; but L T Tr WH [G also in Jn. i. 50 (51)] have restored ὄψῃ (cf. W. § 13, 2; B. 42 sq. (37)), 2 pers. plur. ὄψεσθε, Jn. i. 39 (40) T Tr WH, ete.; Pass., 1 aor. ὥφθην ; fut. ὀφθήσομαι ; 1…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁράω (horaō) — to see: see.

ὁράω,

contraction ὁρῶ even in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect ὁρόω [Refs], etc.; Aeolic dialect ὄρημι (which see); Ionic dialect ὁρέω [Refs 5th c.BC+], 2nd pers. singular ὁρῇς [Refs 3rd c.BC+], 3rd.pers. singular ὁρῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive ὁρῆν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (but 2nd pers. singular ὁρᾷς [Refs 7th c.BC+], 3rd.pers. singular ὁρᾷ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ὁρῶμεν [Refs]; 3rd.pers. plural ὁρῶσι (ἐπ-) [Refs]infinitive ὁρᾶν[Refs] (except when found in Doric dialect, as [Refs 4th c.BC+]; imperfect 3rd.pers. singular ἑώρη [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. singular ὥρα [Refs 5th c.BC+],2nd pers. plural ὡρᾶτε [Refs] 3rd.pers. plural ὥρων [Refs]; Epic dialect 3rd.pers. singular ὅρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἑόρᾱκα, a form required by the metre in many passages, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; whence ἑόρακα, -άκη ought always to be restored in…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁράω

horao

properly, to stare at (compare 3700), i.e. (by implication) to discern

clearly (physically or mentally); by extension, to attend to; by

Hebraism, to experience; passively, to appear:--behold, perceive, see,

take heed.

see GREEK for 3700

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁράω

v.

I see, look upon, experience

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁράω horaō 454x

pluperfect, ἑωράκειν, some list εἶδον as the second aorist of ὁράω, to see, behold, Mt. 2:2, et al. freq.; to look, Jn. 19:37; to visit, Jn. 16:22; Heb. 13:23; to mark, observe, Acts 8:23; Jas. 2:24; to be admitted to witness, Lk. 17:22; Jn. 3:36; Col. 2:18; with θεόν, to be admitted into the more immediate presence of God, Mt. 5:8

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁράω

To see:

absol. to see or look, Hom., etc.; κατ᾽ αὐτοὺς αἰὲν ὅρα he kept looking down at them, Il.; ὁρόων ἐπὶ οἴνοπα πόντον looking over the sea, id. Il.:— ὁρᾶν πρός τι, like Lat. spectare ad, to look towards, ἀκρωτήριον τὸ πρὸς Μέγαρα ὁρῶν Thuc.

to have sight, Soph.: hence says Oedipus, ὅσ᾽ ἂν λέγωμεν, πάνθ᾽ ὁρῶντα λέξομεν [though I am blind], my words shall have eyes, i. e. shall be to the purpose, id. Soph.; ἀμβλύτερον ὁρᾶν to be dim-sighted, Plat.

to see to, look to, i. e. take heed, beware, ὅρα ὅπως . ., Ar.; ὅρα εἰ . . , see whether . . , Aesch., etc.

ὁρᾷς; ὁρᾶτε; see'st thou? d'ye see? parenthetically, esp. in explanations, like Lat. viden'? Ar.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAM-2S — Verb · present · active · imperative · second person · singular
present active imperative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

se: In addition to the ordinary sense of perceiving by the eye, we have

(1) chazah, "to see" (in vision): "Words of Amos .... which he saw concerning Israel" (Am 1:1). The revelation was made to his inward eye. "The word of Yahweh .... which he (Micah) saw concerning Samaria" (Mic 1:1), describing what he saw in prophetic vision (compare Hab 1:1); see REVELATION, III, 4;

(2) horao, "to take heed": "See thou say nothing" (Mr 1:44);

(3) eidon, "to know," "to note with the mind": "Jesus saw that he answered discreetly" (Mr 12:34);

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
10%he has seen
he has seen10% · 6×you have seen8% · 5×we have seen8% · 5×has seen8% · 5×have seen7% · 4×do see that5% · 3×do see5% · 3×having seen5% · 3×other renderings44% · 27×

61 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 29 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb97%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 682 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςὁράωI see, look uponἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheλαλέωI speak, say
ὅς
ἀστήρa starἄγγελοςan angel, messenθηρίονa wild beast, an
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςσύ
σύ
λέγωI say, speakπότεIrgδέbut, on the othe
ὁράωdo see [that]682×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenμήτηρa motherἸησοῦςJesus
αὐτός
Article theπίπτωI fall, fall undλέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀκούωI hear, listenὁράωI see, look uponπιστεύωI believe, have
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theαὐτόςπολύςmuch, many, ofte
ἐγώ
ἀποστέλλωI send forth, seἀφίημιI send away, relκαίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁράω · 682× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Revelation John Mark Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 John James 2 Corinthians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 699 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 69c. AD 40

ἀόρατός τε γάρ ἐστιν αὐτὸς τὰ πάντα ὁρῶν καὶ ἄδηλον ἔχει τὴν οὐσίαν τὰς τῶν ἄλλων καταλαμβάνων·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.3c. AD 100

πρὸς ἡμᾶς δὲ λέγει: Ἰδοὺ αὕτη ἡ νηστεία, ἣν ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην, λέγει κύριος: λύε πάντα σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας, διάλυε στραγγαλιὰς βιαίων συναλλαγμάτων, ἀπόστελλε τεθραυσμένους ἐν ἀφέσει καὶ πᾶσαν ἄδικον συγγραφὴν διάσπα.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 2 59264Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)252 BC

r Σισοῦχος Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. ἐμνήσθης μοι ἰδεῖν τὸν κεραμέα περὶ τῶν κεραμίων. εἰ οὖν σοι δοκεῖ ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος κατασκευάζεσθαι, γράψον

γὰρ ὧδε πωλούμενον. ταύτην δὲ τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἔγραψά σοι εἰς Φιλαδέλφειαν. κατελάβομέν σε καταπεπλευκότα. ἰδόντες δὲ τὴν γῆν ὑποπεφευγυῖαν … εν οὖν συναγοράσαι ὅσου χρείαν εἶχεν ἡ γῆ. γεγράφαμεν

καὶ ἐτάσας περὶ τούτων … οῖς τόποις ἀποστελοῦμεν … ος καὶ τῆς σινδόνος οὐκ εἶδον … αμεν κιθῶνα παραδεδειχέναι … … ἀξιώσαντος τοῦ λῃστοῦ τὸ ω

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
μηδενὶmēdeis nothing G3367 Adjective · dative · singular · masculine
90× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means nothing or no one, used in the Bible to emphasize the absence of something, like in Matthew 16:20 where Jesus tells his disciples to tell no one about him.
Amplified meaning
no one, nothing
Tyndale gloss
nothing
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μηδείς is built from μή (not) and εἷς (one), meaning no one or nothing. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often to emphasize absence or negation, as seen in verses like Matthew 8:4 and Acts 4:17. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μηδείς, -δεμία, -δέν

(and -θέν, Ac 27:33, a Hellenistic form; v. Bl., § 6, 7; Thackeray, Gr., 58),

related to οὐδείς as μή to οὐ,

no, none, no one; neut., nothing: Mt 16:20, Mk 5:43 6:8, Lk 3:14, Ac 8:24, Ro 13:8, al.; c. gen., Ac 4:17 24:23; neut. acc., μηδέν, adverbially, in no respect, Ac 10:20 11:12; as acc. obj. after verb, βλάπτειν, Lk 4:35; ὠφελεῖσθαι,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν (and μηθέν, Acts xxvii. 33 LT Tr WH, —a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as early as B.C. 378, ef. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 73]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181sq.; W. § 5, 1d. 11; [B. 28 (25)]; Kiihner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. μηδέ and εἷς), [fr. Hom. down]; it is used either in connection with a noun, no, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man, neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as μή; accordingly a. with an imperative: μηδείς being the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii. 18, 21; x. 24; Gal. vi.17; Eph. v. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim. iv.12; Tit. ii.15; Jas.i.13; 1Jn.iii.7; neut. μηδέν, 50. ἔστω [A. V. have thou nothing to do with etc.], Mt. xxvii. 19; μηδείς in the dat. or the acc. depending on the impv., Ro. xiii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; μηδέν (accusative), Lk. iii. 13; ix.3; μ. φοβοῦ, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH txt. μή]. b.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μηδείς. According to Thumb ( 7ε]16᾽1. p. 14) the forms μηθείς and οὐθείς appear in the whole Greek world from iv/B.c., and are in wide use at the beginning of the Christian Era, after which they gradually disappear, without leaving any trace in | B Lond’ 42%* (gic: MGr. Weare prepared, therefore, to find that the forms in θ are more frequent in the LXX than in the NT, where there are only a few examples of οὐθείς (principally in the Lucan writings), and only one of μηθείς, namely Ac 2733 according to NBA. A few exx. of μηθείς from the papyri will suffice—P Petr II. 11(1)® (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Selections, p- 7) εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν kal μηθέν σε τῶν ἔργων κωλύει, ΚΕ it is possible and none of your work hinders you,’’ Part V.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μηδείς (mēdeis) — nothing.

μηδείς, μηδεμίᾰ, μηδέν

(i.e. μηδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ μία, μηδὲ ἕν): feminine μηδὲ ἴα or μηδεΐα (or -έϊα) [Refs]:— not one, not even one, nobody (in neuter nothing), once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. μηδὲ εἷς (so written) is found in Attic dialect Inscrr., as [Refs]not even one, μηδὲ ἕν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with an intervening Particle or preposition, μηδ᾽ ἂν ἕνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνός, μηδ᾽ ὑπὸ μιᾶς, [Refs]

II. nobody, naught, good for naught, κἄμ᾽ ἴσον τῷ μ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηδέν or τὸ μηδέν as substantive, naught, nothing, κεἰ τὸ μ. ἐξερῶ [Refs]; μ. λέγειν to say what is naught, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of persons, τὸ μ. a good-for-nothing, τὸ μ. εἶναι, of a eunuch, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἧττον αὐτοῖς ἔνι ἢ τὸ μ., i.e. it is a mere…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν

Adj

no one, nothing

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μηδείς mēdeis 90x

not one, none, no one, Mt. 8:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μηδείς i. e. μηδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ μία, μηδὲ ἕν and not one, related to οὐδείς as μή to οὐ, Il., etc.; —rare in Pl., Xen.

μηδὲ εἷς, which (so written) is never elided even in attic, retained the first emphatic sense not even one, and often had a Particle between, as μηδ᾽ ἂν εἷς, or a prep., μηδ᾽ ἐξ ἑνός, μηδὲ περὶ ἑνός etc., Plat.

nobody, naught, good for naught, ὁ μηδείς Soph.; pl., οὐ γὰρ ἠξίου τοὺς μηδένας id. Soph.:— so, μηδέν or τὸ μηδέν often as Subst., naught, nothing, id. Soph.; μηδὲν λέγειν to say what is naught, Xen.; τοῦ μηδενὸς ἄξιος Hdt.; ἐς τὸ μηδὲν ἥκειν Eur.;—and of persons, τὸ μηδέν a good for naught, τὸ μηδὲν εἶναι of an eunuch, Hdt.; τὸ μ. ὄντας Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-DSM-N — Adjective · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DSM-N Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine Negative

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

nuth'-ing (lo', lo' @me'umah, etc.; medeis, oudeis): "Nothing" is represented by various words and phrases, often with lo', which is properly a substantive with the meaning of "nothing." Most frequently we have lo' me'umah, "not anything" (Ge 40:15; Jud 14:6).

Other forms are lo' dhabhar, "not anything"; (Ge 19:8); lo'khol, "not any(thing)" (Ge 11:6; Pr 13:7); la' (Aramaic), "no," "nothing" (Da 4:35, "as nothing"); 'ephec, "end," "cessation" (Isa 34:12); bilti, "without," "save," "not" (

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 21 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 21c. AD 40

οὗ χάριν τῆς ἀρίστης αὑτοῦ φύσεως οὐκ ἐφθόνησεν οὐσίᾳ μηδὲν ἐξ αὑτῆς ἐχούσῃ καλόν, δυναμένῃ δὲ πάντα γίνεσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 21.8c. AD 100

ἕως ἔτι τὸ καλὸν σκεῦός ἐστιν μεθ̓ ὑμῶν, μὴ ἐλλείπητε μηδενὶ ἑαυτῶν, ἀλλὰ συνεχῶς ἐκζητεῖτε ταῦτα καὶ ἀναπληροῦτε πᾶσαν ἐντολήν: ἔστιν γὰρ ἄξια.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
BGU 6 1260Pathyris102 BC

ἐπελθὼν ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ τάλαντα ἓξ καὶ ἱερὰς βασιλεῦσι ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου δραχμὰς ρκ καὶ μηθὲν ἧσσον κύριον εἶναι τὰ προγεγραμμένα. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τρισχιλίων τριακοσίων · καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐνλιπὸν μοι ἄπρατον γῆς ἀρουρῶν γ, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Κολλούθην μήδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν Ὧρον μήδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον μηδένα τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ τῶν

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
μηδὲνmēdeis to none G3367 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
90× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means nothing or no one, used in the Bible to emphasize the absence of something, like in Matthew 16:20 where Jesus tells his disciples to tell no one about him.
Tyndale gloss
nothing
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μηδείς is built from μή (not) and εἷς (one), meaning no one or nothing. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often to emphasize absence or negation, as seen in verses like Matthew 8:4 and Acts 4:17. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μηδείς, -δεμία, -δέν

(and -θέν, Ac 27:33, a Hellenistic form; v. Bl., § 6, 7; Thackeray, Gr., 58),

related to οὐδείς as μή to οὐ,

no, none, no one; neut., nothing: Mt 16:20, Mk 5:43 6:8, Lk 3:14, Ac 8:24, Ro 13:8, al.; c. gen., Ac 4:17 24:23; neut. acc., μηδέν, adverbially, in no respect, Ac 10:20 11:12; as acc. obj. after verb, βλάπτειν, Lk 4:35; ὠφελεῖσθαι,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν (and μηθέν, Acts xxvii. 33 LT Tr WH, —a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as early as B.C. 378, ef. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 73]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181sq.; W. § 5, 1d. 11; [B. 28 (25)]; Kiihner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. μηδέ and εἷς), [fr. Hom. down]; it is used either in connection with a noun, no, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man, neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as μή; accordingly a. with an imperative: μηδείς being the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii. 18, 21; x. 24; Gal. vi.17; Eph. v. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim. iv.12; Tit. ii.15; Jas.i.13; 1Jn.iii.7; neut. μηδέν, 50. ἔστω [A. V. have thou nothing to do with etc.], Mt. xxvii. 19; μηδείς in the dat. or the acc. depending on the impv., Ro. xiii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; μηδέν (accusative), Lk. iii. 13; ix.3; μ. φοβοῦ, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH txt. μή]. b.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μηδείς. According to Thumb ( 7ε]16᾽1. p. 14) the forms μηθείς and οὐθείς appear in the whole Greek world from iv/B.c., and are in wide use at the beginning of the Christian Era, after which they gradually disappear, without leaving any trace in | B Lond’ 42%* (gic: MGr. Weare prepared, therefore, to find that the forms in θ are more frequent in the LXX than in the NT, where there are only a few examples of οὐθείς (principally in the Lucan writings), and only one of μηθείς, namely Ac 2733 according to NBA. A few exx. of μηθείς from the papyri will suffice—P Petr II. 11(1)® (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Selections, p- 7) εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν kal μηθέν σε τῶν ἔργων κωλύει, ΚΕ it is possible and none of your work hinders you,’’ Part V.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μηδείς (mēdeis) — nothing.

μηδείς, μηδεμίᾰ, μηδέν

(i.e. μηδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ μία, μηδὲ ἕν): feminine μηδὲ ἴα or μηδεΐα (or -έϊα) [Refs]:— not one, not even one, nobody (in neuter nothing), once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. μηδὲ εἷς (so written) is found in Attic dialect Inscrr., as [Refs]not even one, μηδὲ ἕν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with an intervening Particle or preposition, μηδ᾽ ἂν ἕνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνός, μηδ᾽ ὑπὸ μιᾶς, [Refs]

II. nobody, naught, good for naught, κἄμ᾽ ἴσον τῷ μ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηδέν or τὸ μηδέν as substantive, naught, nothing, κεἰ τὸ μ. ἐξερῶ [Refs]; μ. λέγειν to say what is naught, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of persons, τὸ μ. a good-for-nothing, τὸ μ. εἶναι, of a eunuch, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἧττον αὐτοῖς ἔνι ἢ τὸ μ., i.e. it is a mere…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν

Adj

no one, nothing

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μηδείς mēdeis 90x

not one, none, no one, Mt. 8:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μηδείς i. e. μηδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ μία, μηδὲ ἕν and not one, related to οὐδείς as μή to οὐ, Il., etc.; —rare in Pl., Xen.

μηδὲ εἷς, which (so written) is never elided even in attic, retained the first emphatic sense not even one, and often had a Particle between, as μηδ᾽ ἂν εἷς, or a prep., μηδ᾽ ἐξ ἑνός, μηδὲ περὶ ἑνός etc., Plat.

nobody, naught, good for naught, ὁ μηδείς Soph.; pl., οὐ γὰρ ἠξίου τοὺς μηδένας id. Soph.:— so, μηδέν or τὸ μηδέν often as Subst., naught, nothing, id. Soph.; μηδὲν λέγειν to say what is naught, Xen.; τοῦ μηδενὸς ἄξιος Hdt.; ἐς τὸ μηδὲν ἥκειν Eur.;—and of persons, τὸ μηδέν a good for naught, τὸ μηδὲν εἶναι of an eunuch, Hdt.; τὸ μ. ὄντας Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN-N — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN-N Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%nothing
nothing40% · 37×no one39% · 36×no5% · 5×not one5% · 5×not4% · 4×none2% · 2×other renderings3% · 3×

92 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object44%subject24%indirect object18%adverbial11%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 90 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
πρόςπαραγγέλλωI notify, commanλέγωI say, speak
ἵναin order that, so th
αὐτόςμαθητήςa learner, disciπολύςmuch, many, ofte
καίand, even, also, nam
πᾶςall, the whole, ὑπόδημαa sandalἸησοῦςJesus
ἐν
ὑστερέωI am lacking, faμηδείςno one, nothingἵναin order that, s
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
ἸησοῦςJesusλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
μηδείςto none90×
what comes after →
λέγωI say, speak
ἀλλάbut, exceptArticle theὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἀπατάωI deceive, lead παραλογίζομαιI deceive, begui
διακρίνωI distinguish, disce
ὅτιthat, since, becἔρχομαιI come, goArticle the
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakἔτιstill, yet, even
γινώσκωI come to know, lear
οὗτος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμηδείς · 90× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Mark 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy Matthew Titus James Philippians Romans 1 Thessalonians
Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 21 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 21c. AD 40

οὗ χάριν τῆς ἀρίστης αὑτοῦ φύσεως οὐκ ἐφθόνησεν οὐσίᾳ μηδὲν ἐξ αὑτῆς ἐχούσῃ καλόν, δυναμένῃ δὲ πάντα γίνεσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 21.8c. AD 100

ἕως ἔτι τὸ καλὸν σκεῦός ἐστιν μεθ̓ ὑμῶν, μὴ ἐλλείπητε μηδενὶ ἑαυτῶν, ἀλλὰ συνεχῶς ἐκζητεῖτε ταῦτα καὶ ἀναπληροῦτε πᾶσαν ἐντολήν: ἔστιν γὰρ ἄξια.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
BGU 6 1260Pathyris102 BC

ἐπελθὼν ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ τάλαντα ἓξ καὶ ἱερὰς βασιλεῦσι ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου δραχμὰς ρκ καὶ μηθὲν ἧσσον κύριον εἶναι τὰ προγεγραμμένα. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τρισχιλίων τριακοσίων · καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐνλιπὸν μοι ἄπρατον γῆς ἀρουρῶν γ, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Κολλούθην μήδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν Ὧρον μήδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον μηδένα τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ τῶν

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
εἴπῃς·legō may you speak; G2036 Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · second person · singular
1,988× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἶπον (eipon) — to say.

εἶπον

(present ἔπω is used by [Refs 2nd c.BC+]present in use is φημί, λέγω, ἀγορεύω (see. infr. IV), the future ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, the perfect εἴρηκα), Epic dialect and Lyric poetry ἔειπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive εἴπω (Epic dialect εἴπωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative εἴποιμ; infinitive εἰπεῖν, Epic dialect -έμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs]; participle εἰπών: also aorist 1 εἶπα (ἔειπα [Refs 5th c.BC+] as I said, [Refs 1st c.BC+] mostly in Ionic dialect Prose, also [Refs 4th c.BC+], and the 2nd pers. indicative and imperative of this form are preferred in Attic dialect, 2nd pers. singular indicative εἶπας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative εἶπον (on the accent see[Refs 5th c.BC+], -ατον, -ατ; 3rd.pers. plural εἶπαν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; participle εἴπας [Refs 4th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect εἴπαις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in compounds middle ἀπείπασθαι (which see), διείπασθαι (which see)…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

epo

a primary verb (used only in the definite past tense, the others being

borrowed from 2046, 4483, and 5346); to speak or say (by word or

writing):--answer, bid, bring word, call, command, grant, say (on),

speak, tell. Compare 3004.

see GREEK for 2046

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 3004

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔπω εἶπον prob. made up by Nicander as present of εἶπον. to say, Nicander.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAS-2S — Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · second person · singular
second aorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAS-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: second Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
39%said
said39% · 372×he said27% · 260×they said7% · 67×having said4% · 40×other renderings15% · 143×other renderings8% · 73×

955 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 73 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
ἀλλ᾽alla But G235 Conjunction
638× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
But is a strong opposing word, used in Matthew 5:15 and John 7:16. It shows contrast or surprise, like in the phrase 'but God' in Romans 3:31.
Tyndale gloss
but
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀλλά (alla) is an adversative particle, meaning 'but' or 'otherwise.' It is derived from the neuter plural of ἄλλος and is used to introduce opposition or contrast in sentences. In the New Testament, it often appears in contexts that involve negation or exceptions, such as in Matthew 5:15 and John 16:2. The lexicons note its stronger adversative force compared to δέ.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀλλά (ἀλλ’ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146),

adversative particle,

stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Ro 3:31);

opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mt 5:15, 17 Mk 5:39, Jo 7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mk 9:37, Mt 10:20, Jo 12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mt 11:7-9

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀλλά, an adversative particle, derived from ἄλλα, neut. of the adj. ἄλλος, which was originally pronounced ἀλλός (cf. Klotz ad Dévar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, other things se. than those just mentioned. It differs from δέ, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [ef. W. 441 sq. (411)]. 1. But. So related to the preceding words that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to concessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii. 48; Ro. v. 14 sq.; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; Phil. ii. 27 (ἀλλ᾽ ὁ θεός etc.), ete. 2. an objection: Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7; xe 29: 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk. xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp. with καί added, Lk. xii. 7…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀλλά. The closeness οἱ ἀλλά to πλήν appears in more uses than one. Armitage Robinson, Zp/estans, p. 205, has a note on a quasi-resumpltive use of ἀλλά in Eph 524 which is closely paralleled by that of πλήν in ver. 33. Then there are instances of ἀλλά = ‘‘except.” ‘This is clear where we have ἀλλ᾽ ἤ (as in 2 Cor 13%): thus P Petr 11. 9 (3)® (B.c. 24139) ὥστε μηθένα εἶναι ἐνταῦθα ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἡμᾶς, ‘ There is no one left here except ourselves” (Ed.), 2d. 46 (α)" (B.C. 209) καὶ μὴ ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς ἄλλο μηδὲν add’ ἢ τὴν mpoyeypap[μέν]ην ἐγγύην, “has not been pledged for any other purpose than the aforesaid security” (1α.), P Lond 89738 (a.p. 84) (=TIII. p. 207) ὃ μέντοιγε οὐ θέλων. ἀλλὰ ἢ ἀνάγκηι. In P Tebt I. το 419 (B.c. 92) μὴ ἐξέστω Φιλίσκωι γυναῖκα ἄλλην. μ γυ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀλλά (alla) — but.

ἀλλά,

conjunction, originally neuter plural of ἄλλος, otheruise: used adversatively to limit or oppose words, sentences, or clauses, stronger than δέ:

I. in simple oppositions, but,

I.1. after negative clauses, οὐ κακός, ἀλλ᾽ ἀγαθός[Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.1. b after a simple negative, ἦ παραφρονεῖ; οὔκ, ἀλλ᾽ ὕπνος μ᾽ ἔχει[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.1. c frequently after οὐ μόνον, μὴ μόνον, with or without καί, οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀ. πολλάκις[Refs 5th c.BC+], either, not only.. but.., μὴ ὅτι ἰδιώτην τινά, ἀλλὰ τὸν μέγαν βασιλέα[Refs 5th c.BC+]; or, not only not.. but.., οὐχ ὅπως κωλυταὶ.. γενήσεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ.. περιόψεσθε[Refs 5th c.BC+]; the negative form is ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, μὴ ὅτι ὑπὲρ ἄλλου, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ὑπὲρ ἐμαυτοῦ δίκην εἴρηκα[Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀλλά

alla

neuter plural of 243; properly, other things, i.e. (adverbially)

contrariwise (in many relations):--and, but (even), howbeit, indeed,

nay, nevertheless, no, notwithstanding, save, therefore, yea, yet.

see GREEK for 243

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀλλά

Cj.

but, except

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀλλά alla 638x

but; however; but still more; ἀλλάγε, at all events; ἀλλή, unless, except. Ἀλλά also serves to introduce a sentence with keenness and emphasis, Jn. 16:2; Rom. 6:5; 7:7; Phil. 3:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀλλά Conjunct., properly neut. pl. of ἄλλος (with changed accent) otherwise, but, stronger than δέ:

to oppose single clauses, but, Lat. autem, the preceding clause being negat., οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀλλὰ πολλάκις Plat.; so, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅτι, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅπως, are followed by ἀλλά or ἀλλά καὶ . . . , not only . . . , but . . .

after a negative ἀλλά sometimes = ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, except, but, ἔπαισεν οὔτις ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ Soph.

to oppose whole sentences, but, yet, Lat. at:— used by Hom., with imperat. or subj., to remonstrate, encourage, persuade, like Lat. tandem, ἀλλ᾽ ἴθι, ἀλλ᾽ ἄγε, ἀλλὰ ἴωμεν, Hom.

joined with other Particles, ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα, or, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, but then, however, Hdt., etc.

ἀλλὰ γάρ, Lat. enimvero, but really, certainly, attic

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
92%but
but92% · 591×instead2% · 15×other renderings4% · 25×other renderings2% · 12×

643 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial10%object6%predicate3%subject2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 638 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
οἶδαI know, rememberκατεργάζομαιI work out, prodἐπιγινώσκωI come to know,
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγράφωI writeἐν
ἐγώ
ἀπόκρατέωI lay hold of, oθέλημαwill, wish, desi
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegοὐδείςno one, none, noΜωϋσῆςMoses
θεόςGod, a god
Article theἄνομοςlawless, sinful,
ἀλλάBut638×
what comes after →
Article the
Article theπέμπωI sendθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ἐν
οὐNeg
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐνδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ἐν
πᾶςall, the whole, Article theδύναμιςmight, power, ma
ἵναin order that, so th
φανερόωI make clear, viπληρόωI fill, fulfill,σῴζωI save, heal

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀλλά · 638× in the New Testament
John 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Mark Matthew Luke Acts Galatians 1 Peter Hebrews Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτους ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος, ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτει ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα … θαι ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
ὕπαγε,hupagō do go, G5217 Verb · present · active · imperative · second person · singular
79× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To go or depart is the meaning of this word, used in Matthew 8:3 when Jesus heals a leper and tells him to go show himself to the priests. It means to withdraw or retire from a place or situation.
Amplified meaning
depart, go away
Tyndale gloss
to go
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπάγω (transliterated as hupago) combines elements meaning 'to lead under' or 'to withdraw.' It primarily conveys the idea of going away or departing, especially in the New Testament, where it appears in contexts of leaving or dismissing someone (e.g., Matthew 4:10, 8:13). The term can also imply a gradual movement or withdrawal, and it is used euphemistically for death in passages like Matthew 26:24.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπ-άγω

[in LXX: Ex 14:21 (הָלַךְ hi.), elsewhere only as v.l., To 8:21, al. ;]

a word of the vulgar language, in Pres. and impf. only (Bl., § 53, 1).

Trans.

to lead or bring under, subdue (Hom., Hdt., al.; Ex, l.c..

to lead on slowly (Hdt., Xen., al.).

Intrans., to go slowly away, withdraw oneself, depart (so less freq. in cl.; Thuc., Eur., al.): absol., Mt 8:32 13:44, Mk 6:33, Lk 8:42 17:14, Jo 6:67 8:2 11:44 14:5, 28 18:8; οἱ ἐρχόμενοι κ. οἱ ὑπάγοντες, Mk 6:31; ὑπῆγον κ. ἐπίστευον, Jo 12:11; ἵνα ὑπαγῆτε κ. καρπὸν ψέρητε, Jo 15:16; opp. to ἔρχεσθαι, Jo 3:8 8:14; imperat., ὕπαγε,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπ-άγω ; impf. ὑπῆγον ; 1. trans. to lead under, bring under, (Lat. subducere); so in various applications in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; once in the Scriptures, ὑπήγαγε κύριος τὴν θάλασσαν, for yin, he caused to recede, drove back, the sea, Ex. xiv. 21. 2. in the N. T. always intrans. (less freq. so in prof. auth. fr. Hat. down), (Lat. se subducere) to withdraw one’s self, to go away, depart, [ef. ἄγω, 4; and see B. 204 (177)]: absol., Mk. vi. 33; Lk. viii. 42 (where L Tr mre. πορεύεσθαι); xvii. 14; Jn. viii. 21; xiv. 5, 28, (Tob. xii. 5); of ἐρχόμενοι καὶ of ὑπάγοντες, coming and going, Mk. vi. 31; ὑπάγει x. πωλεῖ, Mt. xiii. 44; ὑπῆγον x. ἐπίστευον, In. xii. Ke ta ὑπακοὴ 11; [ἵνα ὑπάγητε x. καρπὸν φέρητε, In. xv. 16]; ἀφίημί τινα ὑπάγειν, to permit one to depart freely wherever he wishes, Jn. xi. 44; xviii.8; ὕπαγε is used by one in dismissing another: Mt. [iv. 10 RT Tr WH]; viii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπάγω. In its Johannine occurrences ὑπάγω is almost always = ‘‘go away,’’ as distinguished from πορεύομαι ‘‘go ona journey”: see Abbott /o#. Voc. p. 142ff., where it is pointed out that before the Last Discourses our Lord never uses πορεύομαι of Himself, except in Jn 1111, where the reference is primarily to a literal journey into Judaea. For ὑπάγω, ‘‘go away,” ‘go back,” in the vernacular we may cite P Oxy X. 12911! (A.D. 30) ᾿Απολλὼς Θέωνος ὑπάγει αὔριον, BGU 11. 4504 (ii/iii A.p.) ὕπαγε ὅπου [ἐστὶ] Oaus, ἵνα πέμψῃς [αὐτὸ]ν πρὸς ἐμέ, P Tebt II. 4174 (illiterate— ili/A.D.) ἤδη εἴ]ρηχέ σοι ὁ {a} πα[τ]ήρ σου [σου ἐξερχομένου ὅτι ὕπαγε πρὸς τὸν Μῶρον καὶ εἴδε τί λέγει περὶ τῆς ᾿Αντινόον, ‘‘your father already told you, when you were e , ὑπακοὴ leaving, to go to Morus and see what he says about Antinoe” (Edd.), and 24. 422° (iii/A.b.) ἐρῖς Ταωσᾶτι ὕπαγε [{π|] μετὰ Μέλανος πρὸς Νεμεσᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπάγω (hupagō) — to go.

ὑπάγω [ᾰ]:

transitive, lead or bring under, ὕπαγε ζυγὸν ὠκέας ἵππους brought them under the yoke, yoked them, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἴπποις (accusative) δ᾽ ἄνδρες ὔπαγον ὐπ᾽ ἄρματα [Refs 7th c.BC+]; also simply, ἡμιόνους ὕπαγον [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. bring under one's power, [οἱ θεοί] σε ὑπήγαγον ἐς χεῖρας τὰς ἐμάς [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— middle, bring under one's own power, reduce, πόλιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. subsume, ὑφ᾽ ἓν μέρος λόγου τὰ ἄρθρα καὶ τὰς ἀντωνυμίας [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; πάντα τῷ τῆς μανίας ὀνόματι [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

4. bring forward in reply, in passive, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπάγω

hupago

from 5259 and 71; to lead (oneself) under, i.e. withdraw or retire (as

if sinking out of sight), literally or figuratively:--depart, get

hence, go (a-)way.

see GREEK for 5259

see GREEK for 71

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπάγω

v.

I go away, depart

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπάγω hypagō 79x

to lead or bring under; to lead or bring from under; draw on or away; in NT intrans. to go away, depart, Mt. 8:4, 13; 9:6; ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Get behind me! Away! Begone! Mt. 4:10; 16:23; to go, Mt. 5:41; Lk. 12:58; to depart life, Mt. 26:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπάγω fut. ὑπάξω aor2 ὑπήγαγον trans. to lead or bring under, ὕπαγε ζυγὸν ἵππους bring them under the yoke, Il.; simply, ὑπάγειν ἡμιόνους Od.

metaph. to bring under one's power, Hdt., Luc.:—Mid. to bring under one's own power, reduce, Thuc.

to bring a person before the judgment-seat (the ὑπό refers to his being set beneath the judge's seat), Hdt.; ὑπ. τινὰ εἰς δίκην Thuc.; ὑπ. τινὰ θανάτου on a capital charge, Xen.

to lead slowly on, to lead on by degrees, τὰς κύνας id. Xen.:— to lead on by art or deceit, Hdt., Xen.; ὑπ. τινὰ εἰς ἐλπίδα Eur.:—so in Mid., Xen.; ὑπ. τοὺς Θηβαίους to win them, Dem.:—in Mid. also to suggest a thing so as to lead a person on, Eur., Xen.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAM-2S — Verb · present · active · imperative · second person · singular
present active imperative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

(halakh, yalakh, bo', yatsa'; ago, hupago, anabaino, erchomi, aperchomai, poreuomai): "Go" ("went," etc.) occurs very frequently in the English Bible, and is the translation of a great many different Hebrew and Greek terms. As the word implies movement of all kinds, physical and mental, it has naturally many applications.

1. In the Old Testament:

In the Old Testament halakh and yalakh are among the commonest words, meaning "to go" in its original sense of "to walk," but also in the most varied senses, according to the verbal conjugations, etc., the preposition attached, and the words in connection with which the terms stand; halakh and yalakh are often used figuratively (translated "to walk," etc.) for to live, to pursue a way of life, e.g. "to walk ever in his ways" (De 19:9; compare

Mt 9:13; 21:28; 28:7; Lu 10:37; Joh 8:11

--SEE Divine Direction, GUIDANCE

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
46%do go
do go46% · 37×go7% · 6×i am going6% · 5×goes5% · 4×he is going4% · 3×going4% · 3×you are going4% · 3×i go4% · 3×other renderings21% · 17×

81 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 24 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 79 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakχαράjoy, gladnessὁράωI see, look upon
ποῦIrg
καίand, even, also,οἶδαI know, rememberDisj
καίand, even, also, nam
θυσιαστήριονan altarκλίνηa couch, bed, maσός
σύ
ἀδελφόςa brotherσῴζωI save, healλέγωI say, speak
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,ἐκεῖνοςδέbut, on the othe
ὑπάγωdo go,79×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of
καίand, even, also, nam
σύπωλέωI sellἐπιγινώσκωI come to know,
σύ
οὐNegδέbut, on the othe
Article the
δέbut, on the otheπίστιςfaith, belief, tἸουδαῖοςJewish
πρός
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπάγω · 79× in the New Testament
John Matthew Mark Revelation Luke 1 John James
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Didache
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 10.90c. AD 75–95

καὶ γὰρ τὸ πλῆθος καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ἀκούοντες παρημέλουν, καὶ πρὸς ὀργὴν λαμβάνοντες τὰ λεγόμενα ὡς οἰωνιζομένου κατὰ τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ προφήτου τὸν Ἱερεμίαν ᾐτιῶντο, καὶ ὑπάγοντες δίκῃ καταψηφισθῆναι πρὸς τιμωρίαν ἠξίουν.

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 4.5c. AD 96

διὰ τοῦτο, ταῦτα ὑμῶν πρασσόντων, εἶπεν ὁ κύριος: Ἐὰν ἦτε μετ̓ ἐμοῦ συνηγμένοι ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ μου καὶ μὴ ποιῆτε τὰς ἐντολάς μου, ἀποβαλῶ ὑμᾶς καὶ ἐρῶ ὑμῖν: Ὑπάγετε ἀπ̓ ἐμοῦ, οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς, πόθεν ἐστέ, ἐργάται ἀνομίας.

The DidacheThe Didache 1.4c. AD 100

ἀπέχου τῶν σαρκικῶν καὶ σωματικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν: ἐάν τίς σοι δῷ ῥάπισμα εἰς τὴν δεξιὰν σιαγόνα, στρέψον αὐτῷ καὶ τὴν ἄλλην, καὶ ἔσῃ τέλειος: ἐὰν ἀγγαρεύσῃ σέ τις μίλιον ἕν, ὕπαγε μετ̓ αὐτοῦ δύο: ἐὰν ἄρῃ τις τὸ ἱμάτιόν σου, δὸς αὐτῷ καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα: ἐὰν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Oxy. 10 1291OxyrhynchosAD 30

Κολλούθου ἐπιστολήν, ἰδοὺ ἀρτάβη σοι γίνεται. ἐὰν δὲ θέλῃς εἰς Ἀλεξάνδρειαν ἀπελθεῖν, Ἀπολλὼς Θέωνος ὑπάγει αὔριον. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους ιζ Τιβερίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ μηνὸς Νέου Σεβαστοῦ κθ.

Aegyptus 31 (1951), p. 179-181 no. 2Fundort: ArsinoitesAD 31–AD 64

οὐ δεδώκατε ἐγκύκλιον. ἐάν σοι ἔλθῃ ἡ ἐπιστολή, εὐθέως παραγείνου· εἰ δὲ μή, ἐγὼ ὑπάγω ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας. ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃς, ἐγὼ καθίσασα ὄνον ἐλεύσομαι εἰς Ἀρσινοΐτην

P.Phil. 33ArsinoitesAD 1–AD 100

μὴ ἄνευ τῆς ἐμῆς γνώσεως τοῦτο ποιήσῃ. ἐὰν οὖν μὴ θελήσῃ ἐμὲ ἐπιγνῶναι ποῦ ὑπάγει, πεμψάτω μοὶ δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν ὅπως καὶ ἐγὼ πορευθῶ εἰς Ἀλεξάνδρειαν καὶ μείνω ἐκεῖ ὀλίγον

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
σεαυτὸνseautou yourself G4771 Reflexive pronoun · second person · accusative · singular · masculine
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
F-2ASM — Reflexive pronoun · second person · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

F-2ASM Part of Speech: reFlexive pronoun Person: second Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύyourself2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
δεῖξονdeiknuō do show G1166 Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · singular
33× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To show or exhibit something, as seen in Matthew 4:8 and John 2:18. This word means to show or make something known. It is used to describe showing or exhibiting something to someone.
Amplified meaning
exhibit, present
Tyndale gloss
to show
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δείκνυμι is a verb meaning 'to show' or 'to make known,' used in various contexts to indicate displaying or proving something. It appears in the New Testament in verses such as Matthew 4:8 and James 2:18. The word is built from a prolonged form of an obsolete primary verb with the same meaning, and it can also be found in different dialects and forms throughout Greek literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δείκνυμι, δεικνύω (v. Bl., § 23, 1; Veitch, s.v.),

[in LXX chiefly for רָאָה hi. ;]

to show, c. acc rei (pers.), dat. pers.;

to show, exhibit: Mt 4:8 8:4, Mk 1:44 14:15, Lk 4:5 5:14 20:24 22:12 24:40, Jo 2:18 5:20 10:32 20:20, Ac 7:3 (LXX), I Ti 6:15, Re 17:1 21:9, 10 22:1, 8, pass., He 8:5 (LXX);

to make known: Mt 16:21, Jo 14:8, 9, Ac 10:28, I…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δείκνυμι. The verb is not.so common as we might have expected, but for the ordinary meaning we may cite P Oxy III. 4717° (ii/A.p.) σύνβολα δεικνύντα, “ Bi showing signs,” and for the metaphorical, as Jas 218, 20. 11. 237% 2! (a.p.. 186) οὐδεμίαν μὲν οὔτε ὕβριν οὔτε ἄλλο ἀδίκημα εἰς αὑτὸν ἁπλῶς ἐφ᾽ ᾧ μέμφεται δεῖξαι ἔχων, “he could not indeed cite a single insult or any other act of injustice against himself with which he charged me” (Kdd.): cf. 2. I. 671% (a.p. 338) ely’ οὕτως διχθῇ [αὐτῶν ἥ καθ᾽ ἡμῶν [πλεο]νεξία, “in this way their aggression against me will be made clear” (Edd.). A ii/A.p. calculation of the naubion-tax upon catoeci, printed in P Tebt II. p. 339f., 1s followed by δέδικ[ται, ‘ proved,” written ‘in a cursive but probably not different hand” (Edd.). OGZS 26718 (iii/B.c.) ot μετὰ ταῦτα δεικνύμενοι (στρατηγοί), where the szmplex takes the place of the commoner ἀποδείκνυμι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δεικνύω (deiknuō) — to show.

δείκνυμι

(also δεικνύω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect δέκνυμι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect δίκνυμι (προ-) [Refs]; 3rd.pers. singular δείκνυ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative δείκνυε[Refs 5th c.BC+], 3rd.pers. singular δεικνύτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: imperfect 3rd.pers. plural ἐδείκνυσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+], also -υον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular δείκνυεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future δείξω [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect δέξω [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 1 ἔδειξα, Epic dialect δεῖξα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect ἔδεξα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δέδειχα [Refs 4th c.BC+] —middle, with perfect passive, for Epic dialect forms δεικνύμενος, δείδεκτο, δειδέχαται, δειδέχατο, see at {δειδίσκομαι}:—passive, future δειχθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐδείχθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δέδειγμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+], Ionic dialect δέδεκται [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—bring…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δείκνυμι

deiknuo

a prolonged form of an obsolete primary of the same meaning; to show

(literally or figuratively):--shew.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δείκνυμι

v.

I point out, show

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δείκνυμι deiknymi 30x

also formed as δεικνύω   3x, to show, point out, present to the sight, Mt. 4:8; 8:4; to exhibit, permit to see, cause to be seen, Jn. 2:18; 10:32; 1 Tim. 6:15; to demonstrate, prove, Jas. 2:18; 3:13; met. to teach, make known, declare, announce, Mt. 16:21; Jn. 5:20; Acts 10:28

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAM-2S — Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · singular
aorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sho.

See SHEW.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
21%do show
do show21% · 7×he showed15% · 5×will show9% · 3×show9% · 3×i will show9% · 3×shows6% · 2×i may show.’3% · 1×has shown3% · 1×other renderings24% · 8×

33 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 33 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σύ
αὐτόςκἀκεῖνοςἄνDisj
καίand, even, also, nam
λίανvery, very much,ὧδεhereὑψηλόςhigh, lofty
λέγωI say, speak
οὗτοςσύ
σεαυτοῦ
ὑπάγωI go away, depar
αὐτός
ἀνάγωI lead up, put tἄγγελοςan angel, messen
δείκνυμιdo show33×
what comes after →
ἐγώ
Article theδηνάριονa denariusὅτιthat, since, bec
Article the
ἱερεύςa priestδοῦλος (II)μαθητήςa learner, disci
αὐτός
πᾶςall, the whole, Article theὅς
σύ
Article theκαλόςbeautiful, good,ἐν
ἀνάγαιονan upper room
μέγας

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδείκνυμι · 33× in the New Testament
Revelation John Luke James Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy Hebrews
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 61 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.2c. AD 40

ἡ γὰρ οὐρανοῦ κίνησις χρόνου φύσιν ἔδειξεν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.141c. AD 75–95

θεασάμενος δὲ αὐτὸν ὁ νεώτατος τῶν παίδων τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐπιγελῶν δείκνυσιν·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 10.3c. AD 96

Ἄπελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου καὶ ἐκ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ πατρός σου εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω: καὶ ποιήσω σε εἰς ἔθνος μέγα καὶ εὐλογήσω σε καὶ μεγαλυνῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου, καὶ ἔσῃ εὐλογημένος: καὶ εὐλογήσω τοὺς εὐλογοῦντάς σε καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD
PapCongr. IV (Firenze 1935) p. 61-Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 158–AD 159

μετεπέμψατο τὸν Ἥρωνα καὶ αὐθαδῶς ἐχρήσατο καὶ ὁ στρατηγὸς περὶ αὐτοῦ ὑπεμνηματίσατο. ἡγεμὼν κύριε, ἔδειξά σοι τὴν αὐθαδίαν τοῦ ἀντιδίκου· δέομαι, κύριε τὸν σωτῆρα τῆς Αἰγύπτου, ἀκοῦσαί μου πρὸς

O.Petr. Mus. 523Theben (?)AD 201–AD 300

ε ιβ ἥμισυ … ὀγδοήκοντα … βίου δειξον … … πιος Πικῶτος … υηριος

P.Wisc. 1 3AD 256–AD 259

τῶν ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Μουσσίου Αἰμιλιανοῦ τοῦ διασημοτάτου τεταγμένων, ἃς καὶ νῦν ὑμῖν δείξω, περὶ τοῦ ἐνοχλεῖν μοι μηκέτι περὶ λειτουργιῶν ἀδυνάτῳ καὶ τῷ σώματι ἀσθενεῖ ὄντι, τοῖς

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
τῷho to the G3588 Article · dative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
to the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
ἱερεῖhiereus priest G2409 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A priest is someone who serves God and leads worship, like in Matthew 8:4 and Acts 14:13. This role can be literal or symbolic, and even applies to Jesus and Christians in Revelation.
Amplified meaning
one who serves God, a spiritual leader
Tyndale gloss
priest
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἱερεύς (i.e., *hiereus*) means 'priest' and is derived from the root related to sacredness. It refers to those who perform sacrificial rites, including Jewish priests, Christ, and metaphorically, Christians as a 'royal priesthood.' The New Testament uses it in several contexts, notably in Matthew and Hebrews, while lexicons also note its use in early Christian inscriptions to denote bishops or presbyters.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἱερεύς, -έως, ὁ

(< ἱερός),

[in LXX for כָּהֵן;]

a priest: ἱ. τ. Διός, Ac 14:13; of Jewish priests, Mt 8:4 12:4, 5, Mk 1:44 2:26, Lk 1:5 5:14, Jo 1:19, He 8:4, al.; of Christ, He 5:6(LXX) He 10:21; of Christians, Re 1:6 5:10 20:6 (Cremer, 293; on the acc. pl., ἱερεῖς, v. Thack., Gr., 147 f.; Bl., § 8, 2).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἱερεύς, -€ws, ὁ, (ἱερός), [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. 1113, a priest; one who offers sacrifices and in general is busied with sacred rites ; a. prop., of the priests of the Gentiles, Acts xiv. 13; of the priests of the Jews, Mt. Vili. 4; xii. 4 sq.; Mk. i. 44; [11. 26]; Lk.i.5; v. 14; Jn. i. 19; Heb. vii. [14 L T Tr WH], 20 (21); viii. 4, ete.; of the high-priest, Acts v. 24 RG (Ex. xxxy. 18; 1 K.i. 8; 1 Mace. xv. 1; Joseph. antt. 6, 12,1); and in the same sense Christ is called ἱερεύς in Heb. v. 6 (fr. Ps. cix. (ex.) 4); Heb. vii. 17; also ἱερεὺς μέγας, Heb. x. 21 (see ἀρχιερεύς, 3) [al. take the adj. here not as blending with iep. into a technical or official appellation, but as descriptive, great; cf. iv. 14]. b. metaph. of Christians, because, purified by the blood of Christ and brought into close intercourse with God, they devote their life to him alone (and to Christ): Rey. i. 6; v.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἱερεύς. It is unnecessary to illustrate at length this very common word, but reference may be made to the complaint in BGU I. 16 (A.D. 159-60) (= Se/ectzons, p. 83f.) which five presbyter-priests (ot € πρεσβύτεροι ἱερεῖς) lodge against a brother-priest (συνιερεύς) ‘‘ of letting his hair grow too long and of wearing woollen garments”—®s κομῶντος [κ]αὶ χρω[μ]ένου épeats ἐσθήσεσι. On the popular use of ἱερεύς to designate a bishop or presbyter in Christian inscrr. of iv/A.D.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἱερεύς (hiereus) — priest.

ἱερ-εύς [ῐ], έως,

Ionic dialect -ῆος, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—Ionic dialect nominative ἱρεύς [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἱᾰρεύς [Refs]; accusative plural τὸς ἱαρές [Refs]:— also ἱέρεως (Attic dialect and proparoxytone accusative to [Refs 4th c.BC+]; genitive ἱέρεω [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; dative ἵρεῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative ἱέρεω [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: ἱερής [Refs 4th c.BC+] ἱαρής [Refs 4th c.BC+]: (ἱερός):—priest, sacrificer, diviner, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ ἱερέως, as a date, [Refs 4th c.BC+], etc. (frequently unaspirated, ἐπ᾽ ἰερέως [Refs]; of the Jewish High Priest, [LXX+1st c.BC+]; at Rome, = pontifex, [Refs]; ἱ. ὁ μέγιστος, = pont. maximus, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἱερεύς

hiereus

from 2413; a priest (literally or figuratively):--(high) priest.

see GREEK for 2413

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἱερεύς, έως, ὁ

n.m.

a priest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἱερεύς hiereus 31x

a priest, one who performs sacrificial rites, Mt. 8:4; Lk. 1:5; Jn. 1:19

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἱερεύς ἱερός a priest, sacrificer, Il., etc.

metaph., ἱερεύς τις ἄτης a minister of woe, Aesch.; and, comically, λεπτοτάτων λήρων ἱερεῦ Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

prest (kohen, "priest," "prince," "minister"; hiereus archiereus; for hiereus megas, of Heb 10:21, see Thayer's Lexicon, under the word hiereus:

I. NATURE OF THE PRIESTLY OFFICE

1. Implies Divine Choice

2. Implies Representation

3. Implies Offering Sacrifice

4. Implies Intercession

II. THE TWO GREAT PRIESTS OF THE OLD TESTAMENT, MELCHIZEDEK AND AARON

III. PRIESTLY FUNCTIONS AND CHARACTER

1. A Strictly Religious Order

2. Priestism Denied

3. The High Priest's Qualifications

4. Symbolism of Aaron's Rod

IV. CONSECRATION OF AARON AND HIS SONS (EXODUS 29; LEVITICUS 8)

1. Symbolism of Consecration

2. Type and Archetype

LITERATURE

A priest is one who is duly authorized to minister in sacred things, particularly to offer sacrifices at the altar, and who acts as mediator between men and God. In the New Testament the term is applied to priests of the Gentiles…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Priest

The Heb. kohen, Gr. hierus, Lat. sacerdos, always denote one who offers sacrifices.

At first every man was his own priest, and presented his own sacrifices before God. Afterwards that office devolved on the head of the family, as in the cases of Noah (Gen. 8:20), Abraham (12:7; 13:4), Isaac (26:25), Jacob (31:54), and Job (Job 1:5).

The name first occurs as applied to Melchizedek (Gen. 14:18). Under the Levitical arrangements the office of the priesthood was limited to the tribe of Levi, and to only one family of that tribe, the family of Aaron. Certain laws respecting the qualifications of priests are given in Lev. 21:16-23. There are ordinances also regarding the…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The English word is derived from the Greek presbyter , signifying an "elder" (Heb. cohen). Origin. --The idea of a priesthood connects itself in all its forms, pure or corrupted, with the consciousness, more or less distinct of sin. Men feel that they have broken a law. The power above them is holier than they are, and they dare not approach it. They crave for the intervention of some one of whom they can think as likely to be more acceptable than themselves. He must offer up their prayers, thanksgivings, sacrifices. He becomes their representative in "things pertaining unto God." He may become also (though this does not always follow) the representative of God to man. The functions of the priest and prophet may exist in the same person. No trace of a hereditary or caste priesthood meets us in the worship of the patriarchal age. Once and once only does the word cohen meet us as…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

One who officiated in the public worship of God, especially in making expiation for sin, being "ordained for men in things pertaining to God, to offer both gifts and sacrifices for sins." In the Old Testament, the priesthood was not annexed to a certain family till after the promulgation of the law by Moses. Before that time, the firstborn of each family, the fathers, the princes, the kings, were priests in their own cities and in their own houses. Cain and Abel, Noah, Abraham, and Job, Abimelech and Laban, Isaac and Jacob offered personally their own sacrifices. In the solemnity of the covenant made by the Lord with his people, at the foot of Mount Sinai, Moses performed the office of mediator, and young men were chosen from among Israel to perform the office of priests, Ex 24:5. But after the Lord had chosen the tribe of Levi to…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
53%priest
priest53% · 17×priests44% · 14×priests?3% · 1×

32 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject42%predicate26%indirect object13%adverbial7%object7%second object7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δείκνυμιI point out, shoμήNegσάββατονthe Sabbath, a w
σύ
λέγωI say, speakὅτιthat, since, becμεταμέλομαιI change my mind
εἰμίI am, exist
ὁρκωμοσίαthe taking of anἄνDisjἀλλάbut, except
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set up,
ἕτεροςanother, differeΜελχισέδεκProp
καίand, even, also, nam
βασιλείαkingship, sovere
ἱερεύςpriest31×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
προσφέρωI bring to, offeδίδωμιI offer, giveγίνομαιI come into bein
Article the
θεόςGod, a godΖεύςaccλατρείαservice, worship
εἰς
Article the
τὶς
ὄνομαname, character,καταβαίνωI go down, come
μόνοςonly, solitary, deso

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἱερεύς · 31× in the New Testament
Hebrews Luke Acts Matthew Revelation Mark John
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 433 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.79c. AD 40

καὶ Μελχισεδὲκ βασιλέα τε τῆς εἰρήνης — Σαλὴμ τοῦτο γὰρ ἑρμηνεύεται — καὶ ἱερέα ἑαυτοῦ πεποίηκεν ὁ θεός (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.119c. AD 75–95

τῶν δὲ ἱερέων τοὺς διασωθέντας τὰ τοῦ Ἐνυαλίου Διὸς ἱερώματα λαβόντας εἰς Σεναὰρ τῆς Βαβυλωνίας ἐλθεῖν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.3c. AD 100

ἀκούσατε, πῶς περὶ τούτου πεφανέρωκαν οἱ ἱερεῖς τοῦ ναοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Μεσορὴ ε ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Φαρμοῦθι … ἐν Ποινκώρει τῆς

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
προσένεγκεprospherō do offer G4374 Verb · second aorist · active · imperative · second person · singular
46× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To bring to means to lead or offer something to someone, especially to God, like in Matthew 4:24 where people brought their sick to Jesus. It's about presenting or offering something to someone.
Amplified meaning
offer, bring near, a gift, a sacrifice
Tyndale gloss
to bring to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

προσφέρω is a verb meaning 'to bring to' or 'to offer,' often in the context of presenting gifts or sacrifices to God. It combines the elements of bringing something near and offering it, applicable in various contexts such as offerings in worship (e.g., Matthew 2:11) and dealing with others (Hebrews 12:7). The word appears frequently in the New Testament and is rooted in both classical and biblical Greek.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

προσ-φέρω,

[in LXX chiefly for קרב hi.;]

to bring to, lead to: c. acc. et dat. pers., Mt 4:24 8:16 9:2, 32 14:35 17:16, Mk 2:4 (WH, R, txt.; sc. αὐτόν) 10:13, Lk 18:15 23:14; pass., Mt 12:22 (act., WH, txt.) 18:24 (προσήχθη, WH) 19:13; c. acc. rei, Mt 25:20; id. c. dat. pers., Mt 22:19, Lk 23:36; τ. στόματι, Jo 19:29; metaph., c. dat pers., to deal with, He 12:7 (cl.).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

προσ-φέρω; impf. προσέφερον; 1 aor. προσήνεγκα ; 2 aor. προσήνεγκον; pt. προσενήνοχα (Heb. xi. 17); Pass., pres. προσφέρομαι; 1 aor. προσηνέχθην ; [see reff. s. v. φέρω]; fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 277, also for #37, 0.21, ete., sometimes also for TIT where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 Κα. xviii. 36 Compl.; 2 Chr. xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring lo, lead to: twa τινι, one to a person who can heal him or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16; ix. 2,32; xiv. 35; xvii. 16; Mk. ii. 4 (se. τινά) x WH Tr mrg.; x. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; pass. in Mt. xii. 22 [where L WH txt. act.]; xviii. 24 R GT; xix. 13; — one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14; τινὰ ἐπὶ Tas συναγωγὰς καὶ Tas ἀρχάς, Lk. xii. 11 [W. § 52, 3] (where T Tr txt. WH εἰσφέρωσιν). προσφέρω τι, to bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20; τί τινι, to reach or hand…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

προσφέρω, “bring to,” “‘ present,’’ is seen in P Fay 2117 (a.p. 134) τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες o[t]s ὀφίλουσιν, ““ presenting their accounts to their creditors,” P Giss I. κοὐδ (a.p. 259) προσφέρων τῇ πόλει... δραχμὰς δεκαεπτὰ ὀβολόν, and P Meyer 23% (end iv/A.D.) παρὰ Τιθοῆτι τῷ προσφέροντί σοι ταῦτά pov τὰ γράμματα: cf. P Par 63!% (B.c. 164) (= P Petr IIL. p. 18) καλῶς ποιήσεις τὴν πᾶσαν προσενεγκάμενος ἐκτένειαν, ‘“‘you will do well in using every effort” (Mahaffy), and P Tebt I. 3318 (B.c. 112) (=Se/ections, p- 31) τὴν πᾶσαν προσενέγκαι σπουδήν. The force seen in Heb 127 appears in P Par 4659 (8.6. 152) (= UPZ i. p. 338) where Apollonius appeals to his brother Ptolemaeus to examine personally into his grievance against a third party—vopitw γὰρ μάλιστα τῶν ἄλλων παρακολουθήκοντά σε τῆι ἀληθείαι πικρότερον προσενεχθήσεσθ᾽ αὐτῶι, “‘when you have investigated the truth you will deal with…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

προσφέρω (prospherō) — to bring to.

προσφέρω

(once ποσφέρω, which see), Doric dialect ποτιφέρω Prov. cited in [Refs 1st c.AD+]: future

__A προσοίσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect aorist προσένεικα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect aorist passive προσηνείχθην [Refs]:—bring to or upon, apply to, π. πύργοισι κλιμάκων προσαμβάσεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηχανὰς [τοῖσι τείχεσι] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. νόμον, ψήφισμα πρὸς τὴν συγγραφήν bring to bear against.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but χέρα τινὶ προσενεγκεῖν lay hands upon.. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, in hostile sense, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (but also in a friendly relation, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {προσφεύγω}, and in supplication to the gods, hold out one's hands to, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἀνάγκην or ἀναγκαίην τισὶ π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so of surgical or medical treatment, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πταρμὸν [τῇ λυγγί] [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

προσφέρω

prosphero

from 4314 and 5342 (including its alternate); to bear towards, i.e.

lead to, tender (especially to God), treat:--bring (to, unto), deal

with, do, offer (unto, up), present unto, put to.

see GREEK for 4314

see GREEK for 5342

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

προσφέρω

v.

I bring to, offer

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

προσφέρω prospherō 47x

to bear or bring to, Mt. 4:24; 25:20; to bring to or before magistrates, Lk. 12:11; 23:14; to bring near to, apply to, Jn. 19:29; to offer, tender, proffer, as money, Acts 8:18; to offer, present, as gifts, oblations, etc., Mt. 2:11; 5:23; Heb. 5:7; to offer in sacrifice, Mk. 1:44; Lk. 5:14; to offer up any one as a sacrifice to God, Heb. 9:25, 28; 11:17; mid. to bear one’s…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

προσφέρω doric ποτι-φέρω fut. προσοίσω ionic aor. pass. -ενείχθην to bring to or upon, apply to, Lat. applicare, Hdt., Eur., etc.; but, πρ. χεῖρά τινι to lay hands upon one, Pind.; also to offer one's hand, as a friend, Xen.:—without dat. to apply, exhibit, employ, use, βίην Hdt.; πρ. τόλμαν to bring it to bear, Pind.: also, πρ. πόλεμον Hdt.

to add, τί τινι Soph., Eur.; τι πρός τι Hdt.

to present, offer, give, λουτρὰ πατρί Soph.; δῶρα Thuc.; θυσίας NTest.

esp. of meat and drink, to offer, to set before one, Xen.; πρ. τινὶ ἐμπιεῖν καὶ φαγεῖν id. Xen.

to bring forward, quote, cite, Pind.

to bring forward proposals, make an offer, πρ. λόγον or λόγους τινι Hdt., Thuc.: absol., πρ. περὶ ὁμολογίας Hdt., Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAM-2S — Verb · second aorist · active · imperative · second person · singular
second aorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
10%offered
offered10% · 5×they brought8% · 4×do offer8% · 4×he may offer6% · 3×offering6% · 3×they were bringing6% · 3×brought6% · 3×offer4% · 2×other renderings44% · 21×

48 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 29 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἱερεύςa priestΣυρίαSyriaἐκεῖνος
ὅς
ἕωςuntil, as far asοὗτοςαἷμαblood
αὐτός
θησαυρόςa treasure, storπρός
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o
τότεthen
προσφέρωdo offer46×
what comes after →
αὐτός
πᾶςall, the whole, δαιμονίζομαιI am demon-posseArticle the
Article the
δῶρονa gift, presentθεόςGod, a godArticle the
περί
Article theἁμαρτίαa sin
ἐγώ
Article theἔτοςa year
ὑπέρ
εἷςoneἑαυτοῦ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπροσφέρω · 46× in the New Testament
Hebrews Matthew Luke Acts Mark John
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 109 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 165c. AD 40

Τὰς δὲ γοητείας καὶ ἀπάτας αὑτῆς ἡδονὴ τῷ μὲν ἀνδρὶ οὐ τολμᾷ προσφέρειν, τῇ δὲ γυναικὶ καὶ διὰ ταύτης ἐκείνῳ, πάνυ προσφυῶς καὶ εὐθυβόλως·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.184c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας θυσίαν προσφέρει τῷ θεῷ κελευσθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.7c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Mich. 5 322 aTebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 46

τοῦ νῦν καὶ ταῖς προγεγραμμέναις ἑαυτοῦ θυγατράσι Ταμαρῆτι καὶ Θαυβάστι, τῇ μὲν Ταμαρῆτι ἃς προσενήνοχεν αὐτῇ ἔτι πάλαι ὁ αὐτὸς Ψύφις ὃς καὶ Ἁρποχρατίων, διʼ ἧς ἔθετο ἡ Ταμαρῆς

P.Fam.Tebt. 21Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 122

συνγραφὴν γάμου τελειωθεῖσαν διὰ τοῦ αὐτοῦ γραφείου τῷ ἐνάτῳ ἔτει θεοῦ Τραιανοῦ, μεθʼ ἃς προσήνεγκεν αὐτῇ κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν συμβίωσιν φερνὴν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς πεντακοσίας , ἁπάσας δραχμὰς χιλίας ἑκατὸν

P.Fay. 21Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 134

παρὰ ταῦτα ποιήσῃ. ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ τοῦτό τινες ἐμέμψαντο ὡς αὐτοὶ μὲν τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες οἷς ὀφείλουσιν, ἐκείνους δὲ μὴ βουλομένους παρʼ αὐτῶν λαμβάνειν ἵνα τὴν παρολκὴν ἐξωνήσωνται τῷ

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
περὶperi for G4012 Preposition
333× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for about or around, used in various contexts such as place, cause, or time. It is often translated as 'about' or 'concerning' in the KJV, and appears in many passages, including Matthew 2:8 and John 16:26.
Tyndale gloss
about
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

One of the workhorse prepositions, standing 333 times. With the genitive it means about, concerning, with reference to. There is no hidden depth here, and it would be a mistake to look for one: its usefulness is that it marks the subject a sentence is circling. In this verse it points at what the earlier accounts were about.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περί, prep. c. gen., acc. (in cl. also c. dat.; cf. M, Pr., 105f.),

with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides).

C. gen.,

of place, about (poët.).

Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mt 2:8, Mk 1:44, Lk 4:38, Jo 16:26, Ac 28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, c. gen., the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mk 5:27, Ac 1:3 28:15, Eph 6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, I Co 7:1, al.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περί, (akin to πέρα. πέραν ; [Curtius § 359]), prep., joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class. Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. circum, circa; around, about. I. with the GeniTIve it denotes that around which an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching, ete., (Lat. de, quod attinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter) [ef. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat. de; in later Lat. also circa): after verbs of speaking, teaching, writing, ete., see under ἀναγγέλλω, ἀπαγγέλλω, ἀπολογοῦμαι, γογγύζω, γράφω, Sydow, διαβεβαιοῦμαι, διαγνωρίζω, διαλέγομαι, διδάσκω. διηγοῦμαι (Heb. xi. 32), διήγησις, εἶπον and προεῖπον, ἐπερωτάω and ἐρωτάω, κατηχέω, λαλέω, λέγω, λόγον αἰτέω. λόγον ἀποδίδωμι, λόγον δίδωμι, μαρτυρέω, μνεία, μνημονεύω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περί τροπὴν δέδωκα, “1 have entrusted to him the care of the whole matter” (Edd.), 7. XII. 15831! (ii/A.D.) γράψον μοι περὶ τῶν ὄντων, ‘ write me revarding the present state of affairs,” and ΒΟῸΣ II. 63218 (ii/a.p.) (= ZAZ, p. 173) ο[ὐ]χ ὀκνῶ σοι γράψαι περὶ THs] σωτηρίας pov καὶ τῶν ἐμῶν, “T am not delaying to write you regarding the health of me and mine.” In P Par 488 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski Zp.” p- 91) ἀκούσαντες... τὰ περὶ σου συνβεβηκότα, we have a mixture of ἀκούσαντες περὶ σοῦ and ἀκούσαντες τά (σοι) συνβεβηκότα ΠΕερί, ‘‘ with regard to,” at the beginning of a new clause (as in 1 Cor 71) may be illustrated from the headings in the Mysteries inscr, from Andania Sy// 653 (=*736)} (B.c. 91) περὶ ἱε]ρῶν Kal ἱερᾶν, α΄. See also P Eleph 134! (B.c, 223-2) περὶ δὲ τῶν εἴκοσι δραχμῶν οὔπω ἐκεκόμιστο Φίλων . περὶ δὲ τοῦ οἰναρίου ΤΙραξιάδης οὔπω εἰσελήλυθεν ἐξ ἀγροῦ, BGU IV. 1097° (time of…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περί (peri) — about.

περί,

Thess., Delph. περ [Refs 5th c.BC+], also Aeolic dialect, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+] V; Elean παρ [Refs]: preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative:—round about, all round (properly different from ἀμφί, on both sides). (Cogn. with Sanskrit pári 'round about'.)

__A WITH GENITIVE,

__A.I of Place, sometimes in Poets, round about, around, τετάνυστο π. σπείους ἡμερίς [Refs 8th c.BC+], on both sides, see at {περιβαίνω} [Refs]

__A.I.2 about near, π. σοῦ πάντα γένοιτο ῥόδα [Refs]

__A.II to denote the object about or for which one does something:

__A.II.1 with Verbs of fighting or contending, π. τινός for an object—from the notion of the thing's lying in the middle to be fought about, π. τῶνδε for these prizes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόλους καὶ μῆτιν ὕφαινον, ὥς τε π. ψυχῆς since it…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περί

peri

from the base of 4008; properly, through (all over), i.e. around;

figuratively with respect to; used in various applications, of place,

cause or time (with the genitive case denoting the subject or occasion

or superlative point; with the accusative case the locality, circuit,

matter, circumstance or general period):--(there-)about, above,

against, at, on behalf of, X and his company, which concern, (as)

concerning, for, X how it will go with, ((there-, where-)) of, on,

over, pertaining (to), for sake, X (e-)state, (as) touching,

(where-)by (in), with. In comparative, it retains substantially the

same meaning of circuit (around), excess (beyond), or completeness

(through).

see GREEK for 4008

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περί

Prep.

about, concerning, around

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περί peri 333x

pr. of place, (1) gen., about, around; about, concerning, respecting, Mt. 2:8; 11:10; 22:31; Jn. 8:18; Rom. 8:3, et al. freq.; (2) acc., of place, about, around, round about, Mt. 3:4; Mk. 3:34; Lk. 13:8; οἱ περί τινα, the companions of a person, Lk. 22:49; a person and his companions, Acts 13:13; simply a person, Jn. 11:19; τὰ περί τινα, the condition, circumstances of any one, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περί around, round about with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radical sense, round about, all round, whereas ἀμφί properly means on both sides.

WITH GENITIVE:

of Place, round about, around, Lat. circum, Od.

about, near, ἑσδόμεναι περὶ σεῖο Mosch.

Causal, to denote the object about or for which one does something:

with Verbs of fighting or contending, μάχεσθαι περὶ πτόλιος Il.; περὶ Πατρόκλοιο θανόντος id. Il.; so, τρέχειν περὶ ἑωυτοῦ, περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς Hdt.

about, for, on account of, μερμηρίζειν περί τινος Il.; φροντίζειν περί τινος Hdt.

with Verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, about, concerning, Lat. circa, de, περὶ νόστου ἄκουσα Od., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%concerning
concerning59% · 199×about16% · 55×for13% · 45×around6% · 19×of3% · 9×other renderings3% · 9×

336 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object8%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 333 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,ἀκούωI hear, listen
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakλαλέωI speak, sayἐρωτάωI ask, question,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἁμαρτίαa sinἀλλάbut, except
μαρτυρέωI witness, testify
Article theἐγώἵναin order that, s
σύ
μέλειit is a care, itγράφωI writeΦαρισαῖοςa Pharisee
περίfor333×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusβασιλείαkingship, sovereτράχηλοςthe neck
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becοὐαίindcl
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,ἵναin order that, sArticle the
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becἀδελφόςa brotherArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ὅςArticle theοὗτος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπερί · 333× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Hebrews Mark 1 Corinthians 1 John 1 Thessalonians Romans 1 Peter Jude

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 297 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

περιέχει γὰρ τὸν νοητὸν κόσμον ἐξαίρετον, ὡς ὁ περὶ αὐτῆς λόγος μηνύει.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

νδ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀδύνατος ὄμμασι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι περὶ Πάθυριν γῆν ἤπειρον σιτοφόρον ἀρουρῶν … ἧς γείτονες νότουπλατεῖαὁδός, βορρᾶ … περίχωμα … προπεπρα

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
τοῦho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
καθαρισμοῦkatharismos cleansing G2512 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A cleansing or purification, like the kind required after childbirth in Luke 2:22. It can also refer to spiritual cleansing from sin.
Amplified meaning
purification, spiritual renewal
Tyndale gloss
cleansing
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καθαρισμός (katharismos) means cleansing or purification and is derived from καθαρίζω (katharizo). It covers various types of ritual and moral purifications, including those related to Jewish customs and the cleansing of lepers and women after childbirth. The New Testament uses it in contexts of ceremonial washings and spiritual expiation, particularly in relation to baptism and the sacrifice of Christ.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† καθαρισμός, -οῦ, τό

(< καθαρίζω),

[in LXX for טֳהָר, טׇהֳרָה, etc.;]

cleansing, purification: Jo 3:25; c. gen. subjc., τ Ἰουδαίων, Jo 2:6; c. gen. obj., of women after childbirth, Lk 2:22; of lepers, Mk 1:44, Lk 5:14; c. gen. rei, τ. ἁμαρτιῶν, He 1:3, II Pe 1:9 (Cremer, 319).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καθαρισμός, -οῦ, 6, (καθαρίζω), acleansing, purification ; aritual purgation or washing, (Vulg. purgatio, purificatio, emundatio): used with a gen. of the subj., τῶν Iovdaiwv, of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals, Jn. ii. 6; without a gen., of baptism (a symbol of moral cleansing), Jn. iii. 25; with a gen. of the obj., and that a person, — of the levitical purification of women after childbirth, Lk. ii. 22; and of lepers, Mk. i. 44; Lk. v.14; with agen. of the thing, ἁμαρτιῶν or ἁμαρτημάτων, a cleansing from the guilt of sins (see καθαρίζω, 1 Ὁ. B.): wrought now by baptism, 2 Pet. i. 9, now by the expiatory sacrifice of Christ, Heb. i. 3 on which ef. Kurtz, Com. p. 70; (Ex. xxx. 10; τῆς ἁμαρτίας pov, Job vii. 21; of an atonement, Leian. asin. 22).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καθαρισμός (katharismos) — cleansing.

κᾰθαρ-ισμός, ὁ,

later form for καθαρμός, [LXX+NT+2nd c.AD+].

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καθαρισμός

katharismos

from 2511; a washing off, i.e. (ceremonially) ablution, (morally)

expiation:--cleansing, + purge, purification(-fying).

see GREEK for 2511

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καθαρισμός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

cleansing, purifying, purification

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καθαρισμός katharismos 7x

ceremonial cleansing, purification, Lk. 2:22; 5:14; mode of purification, Jn. 2:6; 3:25; cleansing of lepers, Mk. 1:44; met. expiation, Heb. 1:3; 2 Pet. 1:9*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καθαρισμός κα^θα^ρισμός, later form for καθαρμός, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ See ABLUTION

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
71%purification
purification71% · 5×cleansing29% · 2×

7 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial43%subject29%object29%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
περίἡμέραa dayκατά
περί
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
αὐτός
δύναμιςmight, power, ma
καθαρισμόςcleansing
what comes after →
Article the
ἸουδαῖοςJewishἁμαρτίαa sinπάλαιof old, long ago
σύ
ὅςκαθώςjust as, as
αὐτός
κατά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαθαρισμός · 7× in the New Testament
John Luke 2 Peter Hebrews Mark
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome
Clement of RomeFirst Clement 60.2c. AD 96

μὴ λογίσῃ πᾶσαν ἁμαρτίαν δούλων σου καὶ παιδισκῶν, ἀλλὰ καθάρισον ἡμᾶς τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῆς σῆς ἀληθείας, καὶ κατεύθυνον τὰ διαβήματα ἡμῶν ἐν ὁσιότητι καρδίας πορεύεσθαι καὶ ποιεῖν τὰ καλὰ καὶ εὐάρεστα ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀρχόντων ἡμῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD
P.Lond. 6 1913Hipponon (Herakleopolites) bzw. KynopolitesAD 334

ρ … ν ἀπαντῆσαι εἰς Καισάριαν τῆς Παλαιστίνης Συρίας πρὸς διάκρισιν περὶ καθαρισμοῦ τοῦ ἁγίου Χριστιανικοῦ πλήθους ἐπειγομένου μου τοιαύτην ἔκβασιν ποιήσασθαι εἰς τὴν προγεγραμμένην Καισάριαν πρὸς

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
σουsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2GS — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύof you2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
hos, hē what G3739 Relative pronoun · accusative · plural · neuter
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-APN — Relative pronoun · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-APN Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwhat1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
προσέταξενprostassō commanded G4367 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To order or command someone to do something, as in Matthew 1:24 and Luke 5:14. This word is about giving instructions or directions. It is translated as 'bid' or 'command' in the KJV.
Amplified meaning
ordered, commanded
Tyndale gloss
to order
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word προστάσσω (i.e., *prostassō*) combines elements meaning 'to arrange towards' and 'to command.' It encompasses the ideas of assigning, appointing, and giving orders, appearing in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Luke and Acts. The lexicons do not present significant disagreements about its meanings or uses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

προσ-τάσσω,

[in LXX chiefly for צוה pi.;]

c. acc. pers., to place at, to attach to.

to give a command, enjoin, appoint: Lk 5:14; c. dat. pers., Mt 1:24; c. acc. rei, Mt 8:4, Mk 1:44; c. acc. et inf., Ac 10:48; pass., Ac 10:33 17:26.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

προσ-τάσσω: 1 aor. προσέταξα; pf. pass. ptep. προστεtaypevos ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down ; 1. to assign or ascribe to, join to. 2. to enjoin, order, prescribe, command : Sept. for ΤῊΝ ; absol. καθὼς προσέταξε, Lk. v. 14; with the dat. of a pers., Mt.i. 24; xxi.6 RG Τ ri, Mt. viii. 4; Mk.i. 44; τινί τι, pass. Acts x. 33; foll. by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 48; το appoint, to define, pass. mpooreraypevot καιροί, Acts xvii. 26 G L (ed. ster. [larger ed. πρὸς teray.}) T Tr WH, for the Ree. προτεταγμένοι. [Syn.: see κελεύω, fin.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

προστάσσω, “appoint,” is read in the critical text of Ac 1725: cf. P Amh II. 2950 (c. B.c. 250) βασιλέως προστάξαντος... ., and P Tebt I. 7% (B.c. 114) βασιλέων προσταξάν των μηθένα τῶν ἐπὶ τῶν κριτηρίων Kal τῶν ἄλ[λ]ων τῶν πρὸς χρείαις δέχεσθαι ἐγκλήματα. . ., ‘‘the sovereigns decree that neither anyone who exercises judicial functions nor any of the other officials shall receive complaints . . .,” where the editors note that the formula βασιλέων προσταξάντων “appears to be used in cases where the following decree is not quoted in its exact words, whether because it was extracted from a series or because the construction is altered to oratio obligua.” See also P Reinach 18?! (B.c. 108) παρὰ Ta... προστεταγμένα. The verb is common in the inscrr., e.g. Sy/Z 365 (= *798)!® (a.p. 37) ὁ δὲ δῆμος - προσέταξε τοῖς ἄρχουσι ψήφισμα ὑπαντήσεως εἰσηγήσασθαι αὐτοῖς, and 1206. 523 (-- 3 ς78)}8.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

προστάσσω (prostassō) — to order.

προστάσσω,

Attic dialect προστάττω ; Doric dialect ποτιτάσσω [Refs] also ποιτάσσω [Refs]: perfect προστέταχα [LXX]:—passive, [Refs] aorist προσετάχθην (see. below), also [Refs] aorist προσετάγην[LXX]

I. with accusative person,

I.1. place or post at a place, χωρεῖτε οἷ προστάσσομεν (i.e. ὑμᾶς) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: —passive, προσταχθέντα.. πύλαις [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. attach to, πρὸς τοῖσι ἔθνεσι τοὺς πλησιοχώρους π. attaching to certain tribes their next neighbours, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τινάς τινι assign them to his command, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, Ἰνδοὶ προσετετάχατο.. Φαρναζάθρῃ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

προστάσσω

prostasso

from 4314 and 5021; to arrange towards, i.e. (figuratively)

enjoin:--bid, command.

see GREEK for 4314

see GREEK for 5021

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

προστάσσω

v.

I instruct, command, appoint

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

προστάσσω prostassō 7x

pr. to place or station at or against; to enjoin, command, direct, Mt. 1:24; 8:4; Mk. 1:44; to assign, constitute, appoint, Acts 17:26

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

προστάσσω attic -ττω fut. ξω c. acc. pers.,

to place or post at a place, χωρεῖτε οἷ προστάσσομεν (sc. ὑμᾶς) Eur.:—Pass., προσταχθείς πύλαις Aesch., etc.

to attach to, assign to, Hdt.; πρ. τινάς τινι to assign them to his command, Thuc.:—Pass., Ἰνδοὶ προσετετάχατο Φαρναζάθρῃ Hdt.

reversely, πρ. ἄρχοντα to appoint as commander over others, id. Hdt.

c. acc. rei, to give as a command, prescribe, enjoin, ἔργον, πόνον πρ. τινί id. Hdt., etc.:—Pass., τοῖσι δὲ ἵππος προσετέτακτο to others orders had been given to supply cavalry, id. Hdt.; τὰ προσταχθέντα orders given, id. Hdt.; τὸ προστεταγμένον id. Hdt.; τὰ προσταχθησόμενα orders that will be given, Xen.:—absol., προσταχθέν μοι the order having been given me…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
57%commanded
commanded57% · 4×he commanded29% · 2×ordered14% · 1×

7 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb86%object14%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὅς
δῶρονa gift, presentσύ
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
ποιέωI do, make
καθώςjust as, as
σύ
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole,
ὁρίζωI define, determine,
γῆthe earth, soil,
προστάσσωcommanded
what comes after →
ΜωϋσῆςMoses
εἰς
αὐτός
Article the
σύ
ὑπό
δέbut, on the other ha
αὐτός
καιρόςfitting season, oppo
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπροστάσσω · 7× in the New Testament
Acts Matthew Luke Mark
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 31 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaWho is the Heir of Divine Things 113c. AD 40

τὰ συντείνοντα οὖν πρὸς τὴν κατασκευὴν ἴδωμεν ὃν τρόπον εἰσφέρειν προσέταξεν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.59c. AD 75–95

καὶ σημεῖον ἐπιβαλών, ᾧ γνώριμος ἂν εἴη, προσέταξεν ἀπιέναι.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 20.11c. AD 96

ταῦτα πάντα ὁ μέγας δημιουργὸς καὶ δεσπότης τῶν ἁπάντων ἐν εἰρήνῃ καὶ ὁμονοίᾳ προσέταξεν εἶναι, εὐεργετῶν τὰ πάντα, ὑπερεκπερισσῶς δὲ ἡμᾶς τοὺς προσπεφευγότας τοῖς οἰκτιρμοῖς αὐτοῦ διὰ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD
PSI 15 1521OxyrhynchosAD 54

κατὰ τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος Λουσίου Γέτα προστεταγμένα τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι περὶ Σενέπτα τῆς μέσης τοπαρχίας ἐκ τοῦ Διονυσοφάνους … κλήρου ἀρούρας

BASP 39 (2002), p. 7-11Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 60–AD 61

Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος· κατὰ τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος Λουκίου Ἰουλίου Οὐεστίνου προστεταγμένα ἀπογράφομαι τὸ ὑπάρχον μοι εἰς τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν καθαρὸν ἀπὸ ὀφειλῆς ὑποθήκης καὶ παντὸς

CdÉ 31 (1956), p. 112-Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 90–AD 91

ἐπικριθῆναι εἰς τὸ ἐνεστὸς δέκατον ἔτος κατὰ τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος Μεττίου Ῥούφου προστεταγμένα, ὑπέταξα αὐτῶν τὰ δίκαια. ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν Πολέμων ὁ προγεγραμμένος ἀπεγραψάμην σὺν τῇ γυναικὶ

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
ΜωϋσῆςMōusēs, Mōsēs Moses G3475 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
80× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Moses was the Hebrew lawgiver, who received the Ten Commandments from God. He is mentioned in Matthew 8:4 and 17:3-4. Moses is a key figure in the Bible.
Amplified meaning
the Hebrew lawgiver
Tyndale gloss
Moses
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Μωϋσῆς (transliterated as Mōusēs) refers to Moses, the Hebrew lawgiver. It appears in various forms in the New Testament, including references to the law of Moses and the books attributed to him. Notably, there are variations in spelling, with Μωσῆς also being used. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dat. -ῆ (as LXX: Ex 5:20, al.), and -εῖ, acc. -ῆν (as LXX) and -έα (Lk 16:29 only), (Heb. מֹשֶׁה),

Moses: Mt 8:4 17:3, 4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Lk 2:22 24:44, Jo 7:23, Ac 13:39 15:5 28:23, I Co 9:9, He 10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Lk 16:29 24:27, Ac 15:21, II Co…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Μωσῆς (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo (16, 2, 35 ed. Meineke); Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in Philo [cf. his “ Buch ν. ἃ. Weltschopf.” ed. Miiller p. 117 (but Richter in his ed. has adopted Μωῦσῆς)], after the Hebr. form Aw, which in Ex. ii. 10 is derived fr. Aw to draw out), and Mwic4s (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.’s 4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Josephus [“in Josephus the readings vary; in the Antiquities he still adheres to the classic form (Μωσῆς), which moreover is the common form in his writings,” Miiller’s note on Joseph. ὁ. Ap. 1, 31,4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt Moiojs uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. ef. Otto’s note on Justin Mart. apol. i. § 32 init.], and in the N. T. ed. Tdf.;— a word which signifies in Egyptian watersaved, i. 6. ‘saved from water’; οἵ. Fritzsche, Rom. vol. ii. p. 818; and esp. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p.824; Knobel on Ex. ii.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Μωϋσῆς, Μωσῆς (Mōusēs, Mōsēs) — Moses.

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dative - (as LXX: Exo.5:20, al.), and -εῖ, accusative -ῆν (ac LXX) and -έα (Luk.16:29 only) (Heb. מֹשֶׁה),

Moses: Mat.8:4 17:3-4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22 24:44, Jhn.7:23, Act.13:39 15:5 28:23, 1Co.9:9, Heb.10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Luk.16:29 24:27, Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Μωϋσῆς

Moseus

or Moses mo-sace',

or Mouses mo-oo-sace'

of Hebrew origin; (4872); Moseus, Moses, or Mouses (i.e. Mosheh), the

Hebrew lawgiver:--Moses.

see HEBREW for 04872

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Μωσῆς, έως, ὁ

n.m.

Moses

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Μωϋσῆς Mōysēs 80x

also spelled Μωσῆς, Moses, pr. name, Mt. 8:4; Jn. 1:17; Rom. 5:14

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

mo'-zez, mo'-ziz (mosheh; Egyptian mes, "drawn out," "born"; Septuagint Mouse(s)). The great Hebrew national hero, leader, author, law-giver and prophet.

I. LIFE

1. Son of Levi

2. Foundling Prince

3. Friend of the People

4. Refuge in Midian

5. Leader of Israel

II. WORK AND CHARACTER

1. The Author

2. The Lawgiver

3. The Prophet

LITERATURE

The traditional view of the Jewish church and of the Christian church, that Moses was a person and that the narrative with which his life-story is interwoven is real history, is in the main sustained by commentators and critics of all classes.

It is needless to mention the old writers among whom these questions were hardly under discussion. Among the advocates of the current radical criticism may be mentioned Stade and Renan, who minimize the historicity of the Bible narrative at this point. Renan thinks the narrative "may be very probable." Ewald, Wellhausen…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Moses

Drawn (or Egypt. mesu, “son;” hence Rameses, royal son). On the invitation of Pharaoh (Gen. 45:17-25), Jacob and his sons went down into Egypt. This immigration took place probably about 350 years before the birth of Moses. Some centuries before Joseph, Egypt had been conquered by a pastoral Semitic race from Asia, the Hyksos, who brought into cruel subjection the native Egyptians, who were an African race. Jacob and his retinue were accustomed to a shepherd’s life, and on their arrival in Egypt were received with favour by the king, who assigned them the “best of the land”, the land of Goshen, to dwell in. The Hyksos or “shepherd” king who thus showed favour to Joseph and his family was in all probability the Pharaoh Apopi (or Apopis).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(Heb. Mosheh , "drawn," i.e. from the water; in the Coptic it means "saved from the water"), the legislator of the Jewish people, and in a certain sense the founder of the Jewish religion. The immediate pedigree of Moses is as follows: Levi was the father of: Gershon -- Kohath -- Merari Kohath was the father of: Amram = Jochebed Amram = Jochebed was the father of: Hur = Miriam -- Aaron = Elisheba -- Moses = Zipporah Aaron = Elisheba was the father of: Nadab -- Abihu -- Eleazar -- Ithamar Eleazar was the father of: Phineas Moses = Zipporah was the father of: Gershom -- Eliezer Gershom was the father of: Jonathan The history of Moses naturally divides itself into three periods of 40 years each. Moses was born at Goshen, In Egypt, B.C. 1571. The story of his birth is thoroughly Egyptian in its scene. His mother made extraordinary efforts for his preservation from the general destruction of…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The name of the illustrious prophet and legislator of the Hebrews, who led them from Egypt to the Promised Land. Having been originally imposed by a native Egyptian princess, the word is no doubt Egyptian in its origin, and Josephus gives its true derivation—from the two Egyptian words, MO, water, and USE, saved. With this accords the Septuagint form, MOUSES. The Hebrews by a slight change accommodated it to their own language, as they did also in the case of some other foreign words; calling it MOSHIE, from the verb MASHA, to draw. See Ex 2:10. Moses was born about 15.71 B. C., the son of Amram and Jochebed, of the tribe of Levi, and the younger brother of Miriam and Aaron. His history is too extensive to permit insertion here, and in general too well known to need it. It is enough simply to remark, that it is divided into three…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
95%moses
moses95% · 75×moses?3% · 2×moses’3% · 2×

79 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject50%adverbial25%object9%indirect object8%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 80 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπίἐκδέbut, on the othe
νόμοςa law, the Mosaic La
Article theἐντὶς
καίand, even, also, nam
εἷςoneνεκρόςdead, a corpseγίνομαιI come into bein
προστάσσωI instruct, command,
ὅςκαθώςjust as, as
διδάσκαλοςa teacher
λέγωI say, speak
ΜωϋσῆςMoses80×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἨλίαςElijahεἰμίI am, exist
εἰς
μαρτύριονwitness, evidencὅς
γάρfor
λέγωI say, speakἐκγράφωI write
δίδωμιI offer, give
σύArticle the
λέγωI say, speak
ἐάνCondἐγώἔκφοβοςgreatly terrifie

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΜωϋσῆς · 80× in the New Testament
Acts John Hebrews Luke Mark Matthew Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Jude Revelation
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 600 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 2c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δ’ ἑκάτερον ὑπερβάς, τὸ μὲν ὡς ἄσκεπτον καὶ ἀταλαίπωρον καὶ ἀφιλόσοφον, τὸ δ’ ὡς κατεψευσμένον καὶ μεστὸν γοητείας, παγκάλην καὶ σεμνοτάτην ἀρχὴν ἐποιήσατο τῶν νόμων, μήτ’ εὐθὺς ἃ χρὴ πράττειν ἢ τοὐναντίον ὑπειπὼν μήτ’, ἐπειδὴ προτυπῶσαι τὰς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.21c. AD 75–95

τοῦτο δὴ παιδεῦσαι βουληθεὶς Μωυσῆς τὸ παίδευμα τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ πολίτας τῆς τῶν νόμων θέσεως οὐκ ἀπὸ συμβολαίων καὶ τῶν πρὸς ἀλλήλους δικαίων ἤρξατο τοῖς ἄλλοις παραπλησίως, ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν καὶ τὴν τοῦ κόσμου κατασκευὴν τὰς γνώμας αὐτῶν ἀναγαγὼν καὶ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.7c. AD 100

ἡμῶν μέν: ἀλλ̓ ἐκεῖνοι οὕτως εἰς τέλος ἀπώλεσαν αὐτὴν λαβόντος ἤδη τοῦ Μωϋσέως.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Lond. 6 1916Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 330–AD 340

καὶ ἄπα Σουροῦ καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς περὶ ὑμᾶς κατʼ ὄνομα Μωυσῆς καὶ Ἑριηοῦς οἱ ὑποδεέστεροι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ χαίρειν. πρῶτον μὲν τὴν προσκύνησιν ὑμῶν ποιούμενοι,

Stud.Pal. 8 799Arsinoites (?)AD 401–AD 600

παρέσχε Μωυσῆς ἀπὸ φόρου κήπου νομισμάτια δύο ῥυπαρὰ νομισμάτια β ῥυπαρὰ μόνα Τῦβι ε η ἰνδικτίονος

BGU 3 736Arsinoiton PolisAD 544

ζ η ἰνδικτίωνος ἐπʼ Ἀρσινόης. Αὐρήλιοι Ἀπόλλων υἱὸς Ἀ … α … … καὶ Μωύσης υἱὸς Γεροντίου ἀπὸ κώμης Δι … Αὐρηλίῳ ἄπα Ὂλ υἱῷ Ἰουλίου … ρ

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
εἰςeis for G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςfor1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
μαρτύριονmarturion a testimony G3142 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
20× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to something that provides evidence or proof, like a witness or a testimony. In the Bible, it appears in Acts 4:33 and 1 Corinthians 1:6. It's about providing proof of something.
Amplified meaning
proof, evidence
Tyndale gloss
testimony
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μαρτύριον is a neuter noun meaning testimony, witness, or proof. It is derived from the word for witness and is used in various contexts, including legal and religious settings. In the New Testament, it appears in verses such as Acts 4:33 and 2 Corinthians 1:12, often referring to the testimony of Christ or the apostles. The term also denotes the sacred tabernacle in some instances.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μαρτύριον, -ου, τό

(< μάρτυρ),

[in LXX chiefly for מוֹעֵד, also for עֵדָה, עֵדוּת and cogn. forms;]

a testimony, witness, proof (Hdt., Thuc., al.): c. gen. subj., II Co 1:12, II Th 1:10; c. gen. obj., Ac 4:33, I Co 1:6 2:1 (WH, txt., R, txt., μυστήριον; II Ti 1:8; εἰς μ., Mt 8:4 10:18 Mt 24:14, Mk 1:44 6:11 13:9, Lk 5:14 9:5 21:13,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μαρτύριον, -ov, τό, (udprup [cf μάρτυς). [fr. Pind., Hat. down], Sept. for ty, 11)", oftener for n37y (an ordinance, precept); most freq. for 73:1 (an assembly), as though that came fr. 73)’ to testify, whereas it is fr. yy to appoint; testimony ; a. w. a gen. of the subj.: τῆς συνειδήσεως, 2 Co. i. 12; w. gen. of obj.: ἀποδιδόναι τὸ μ τῆς ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ, Acts iv. 33. b. τοῦ Χριστοῦ, concerning Christ the Saviour [cf. W. § 30, 1.4.7: the proclamation of salvation by the apostles is so called (for reasons given under paprupéw, init.), 1 Co. i. 6; also τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν, 2 Tim. i. 8; τοῦ θεοῦ, concerning God [W. u. 5.7, i. 6. concerning what God has done through Christ for the salvation of men, 1 Co. ii. 1 [here WH txt. μυστήριον}; w. the subject. gen. ἡμῶν, given by us, 2 Th. i. 10. to give testimony concerning those things which were to be spoken (in the Messiah’s time) i. e. concerning…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μαρτύριον. The words of the sepulchral epitaph Aazbel 3071 μαρτύριον ὀρθοῦ βίου, ‘‘the witness of an upright life,’”’ have a modern ring about them. In 24. 1063° (v/vi A.D.) wkoδομήθη τὸ μα]ρ[τ]ύριον Matw τῇ €, the word refers to a martyr’s shrine: cf. P Oxy VI. 9414 (vi/a.D.) ἀντὶς τοῦ μαρτυρίου, ‘‘opposite the martyr’s shrine,’’ where the editors draw attention to the remarkable form ἀντίς, employed in a local sense—a usage which survives in MGr. See also Pe/agia-Legenden, p. 31° συνελθόντας οὖν ἐν ᾿Αντιoxela ἐκέλευσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ ἐπίσκοπος μεῖναι ἐν τῷ μαρτυρίῳ τοῦ ἁγίου ᾿Τουλιανοῦ.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μαρτύριον (marturion) — testimony.

μαρτύριον [ῠ], τό,

testimony, proof, πρῶτον καὶ μέγιστον μ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μαρτύριον δέ.., followed by γάρ, here is a proof, namely.., [Refs], etc.; μέγα τόδε μ.,.. γάρ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. τὰ μ. the tables of the Decalogue, [LXX]

III. shrine of a martyr, [Refs 6th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μαρτύριον

marturion

neuter of a presumed derivative of 3144; something evidential, i.e.

(genitive case) evidence given or (specially), the Decalogue (in the

sacred Tabernacle):--to be testified, testimony, witness.

see GREEK for 3144

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μαρτύριον, ου, τό

n.n.

witness, evidence, testimony

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μαρτύριον martyrion 19x

testimony, evidence, Acts 4:33; 2 Cor. 1:12; Jas. 5:3; in NT testimony, mode of solemn declaration, Mt. 8:4; Lk. 9:5; testimony, matter of solemn declaration, 1 Cor. 1:6; 2:1; 1 Tim. 2:6; σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου, a title of the Mosaic tabernacle, Acts 7:44; Rev. 15:5

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μαρτύριον μαρτύ^ριον, ου, τό, a testimony, proof, Hdt., etc.; μαρτύρια παρέχεσθαι to bring forward evidence, id. Hdt.: —μαρτύριον δέ . . , followed by γάρ, here is a proof, namely . . , id. Hdt., Thuc., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Testimony

(1.) Witness or evidence (2 Thess. 1:10).

(2.) The Scriptures, as the revelation of God’s will (2 Kings 11:12; Ps. 19:7; 119:88; Isa. 8:16, 20).

(3.) The altar raised by the Gadites and Reubenites (Josh. 22:10).

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The whole revelation of God, testifying to man what he is to believe, do, and hope, Ps 19:7 119:88,99 1Co 1:6 Re 1:2. The two stone tables of the law were a visible "testimony" or witness of God’s covenant with his people; and hence the ark of the covenant was called sometimes the testimony, or the ark of the testimony, Ex 25:22 34:29. See ARK.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ LEGAL

See EVIDENCE

See WITNESSES

Ark of

See ARK

→ RELIGIOUS 1Ch 16:8,9; Ps 9:11; 18:49; 26:6,7; 119:27,172; 145:11,12; Isa 12:4-6; 32:4; 43:10; 44:8; 45:24; Jer 51:10; Mt 5:15; 10:32; Mr 4:21; 5:16,19,20; Lu 8:16,38,39; 12:8,9; 24:48; Joh 4:28-30,39,41,42; 15:27; Ac 1:8,22; Ro 10:9,10; 1Co 1:5,6; 12:3…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%testimony
testimony100% · 19×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial50%subject25%object15%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 20 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰς
ΜωϋσῆςMosesἐγώσύ
Article the
σκηνήa tent, tabernacἀποδίδωμιI give back, retκαθώςjust as, as
μαρτύριονa testimony20×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,
Article the
ἀπόστολοςan apostle, a meΧριστόςanointed, the MeθεόςGod, a god
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article the
ἐπί
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, exist
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμαρτύριον · 20× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians 2 Timothy Hebrews James Revelation
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 185 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 88c. AD 40

καὶ τοῦ καμάτου μαρτύριον ἐναργέστατον αἱ ἐτήσιοι ὧραι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.66c. AD 75–95

ὡς δʼ ἐπευφήμησε τῷ βασιλεῖ σωτηρίαν ὁ λαὸς, τὰ μέλλοντα συμβήσεσθαι καταγράψας αὐτοῖς ὁ προφήτης ἀνέγνω τοῦ βασιλέως ἀκροωμένου καὶ τὸ βιβλίον τίθησιν ἐν τῇ τοῦ θεοῦ σκηνῇ ταῖς μετέπειτα γενεαῖς μαρτύριον ὧν προείρηκε.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 8.3c. AD 100

οἱ ῥαντίζοντες παῖδες οἱ εὐαγγελισάμενοι ἡμῖν τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ τὸν ἁγνισμὸν τῆς καρδίας, οἷς ἔδωκεν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τὴν ἐξουσίαν ʽοὖσιν δεκάδυο εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν φυλῶν ὅτι δεκάδυο φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ̓, εἰς τὸ κηρύσσειν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
5th c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Ant. 2 88HermopolitesAD 221

ἀξιῶ αὐτὸ τοῦτο μαρτυρόμενος καὶ ἐπιδιδοὺς τόδε τὸ βιβλίδιον εἶναι αὐτὸ ἐν καταχωρισμῷ πρὸς μαρτύριον … … … … ε Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου Ἀντωνίνου

P.Oxy. 54 3759OxyrhynchosAD 325

τινων ἀνήνεγκεν ἐπὶ τὸν κύριόν μου τὸν ἔπαρχον καὶ καθʼ ἑτέρων εἰσάγει νῦν. τοῦτο μαρτύριον ἔσται μοι τῆς παραγραφῆς. ὁ λογιστὴς εἶπεν· αὐτὸ τὸ ἐπίσταλμα ὃ ἐπέστειλας τῷ ἀντιδικοῦντί

P.Lond. 2 p. 305 no. 404Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)AD 346

γὰρ, καὶ λέγουσιν ὅτι δυνατόν ἐστιν. ἀσπάζομαι τὴν Νόνναν καὶ τὸν γλυκύτατον Κωνστάντιν. ἀσπάζομαι Μαρτύριον. ἀσπάζομαι Εὐφρόνιν. ἀσπάζομαι Σύρον δομεστικὸν καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὸν πατέρα. ἀσπάζομαι Μαξενθίαν

And He says to him; do see [that] nothing to none may you speak; But do go, yourself do show to the priest and do offer for the cleansing of you what commanded Moses for a testimony to them.
αὐτοῖς.autos to them. G846 Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DPM — Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςto them.5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate